Important information about this manual€¦ · Scrapping of your Toyota The SRS airbag and seat...

’01 HIGHLANDER_U (L/O 0106)

ii 2001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against something which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to avoid or reduce the risk to yourself and otherpeople.

NOTICE

This is a warning against something which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.


iii 2001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)

Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyotalimited warranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Sup-plement”.

Your responsibility for maintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that thespecified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives de-tails of these maintenance requirements. Also includedin Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduledmaintenance information, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accesso-ries for Toyota vehicles are currently available in themarket. You should know that Toyota does not warrantthese products and is not responsible for their perfor-mance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage theymay cause to, or adverse effect they may have on,your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durabili-ty, and may even violate governmental regulations. Inaddition, damage or performance problems resulting fromthe modification may not be covered under warranty.


iv 2001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)

Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equip-ment Standard.

Installation of a mobiletwo−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such asmultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuelinjection system, cruise control system, anti−lock brakesystem, traction control system, vehicle skid control sys-tem, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner sys-tem, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for pre-cautionary measures or special instructions regardinginstallation.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices inyour Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicleis scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left asthey are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Besure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seatbelt pretensioner removed and disposed of by the quali-fied service shop or by your Toyota dealer before youdispose of your vehicle.


v 2001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)

On−pavement and off−roaddriving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate thanother types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle andmaneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car be-cause it is designed for off−road use also. In addition,this vehicle has a higher ground clearance and center ofgravity than that of an ordinary passenger car. Thisvehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to bemore likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of control, accidents orvehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sureto read “Off−road vehicle precautions” on page 178 inSection 2 and “Off−road driving precautions” on page196 in Section 3.


vi 2001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)


12001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSOverview of instruments and controlsInstrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1


2 2001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)

Instrument panel overview1. Side defroster outlets

2. Instrument cluster

3. Garage door opener

4. Center vents

5. Electric moon roof switch and personallight

6. Auxiliary box

7. Side vents

8. Power door lock switches

9. Power window switches

10. Glove box

11. Auxiliary box or ashtray

12. Automatic transmission selector lever

13. Hood lock release lever

14. Parking brake pedal

15. Window lock switch



1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog light switches

2. Instrument panel light control knob

3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Emergency flasher switch

5. Clock

6. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

7. Rear window defogger switch

8. Air conditioning controls

9. Car audio

10. Power outlet

11. Snow mode button

12. Seat heater switches

13. Cigarette lighter

14. Ignition switch

15. Cruise control switch

16. Tilt steering lock release lever

17. Traction control system off switch (two−wheel drive models)

18. Outside rear view mirror defogger andwindshield wiper deicer switch

�Vehicles with manual air conditioning controls



19. Theft deterrent system/Engine immobiliser system indicator light

20. Power rear view mirror control switches



1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog light switches


3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Emergency flasher switch

5. Clock

6. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

7. Air conditioning controls and multi−information display

8. Rear window defogger switch

9. Car audio

10. Power outlet

11. Snow mode button

12. Seat heater switches

13. Cigarette lighter

14. Ignition switch

15. Cruise control switch

16. Tilt steering lock release lever

17. Traction control system off switch (two−wheel drive models)

18. Outside rear view mirror defogger andwindshield wiper deicer switches

�Vehicles with automatic air conditioning controls



19. Theft deterrent system/Engine immobiliser system indicator light

20. Power rear view mirror control switches



Instrument cluster overview

1. Tachometer

2. Service reminder indicators and indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Trip meter reset knob

8. Odometer and two trip meters




Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

Brake system warning light∗1

Discharge warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1 Open door warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warninglight∗1

or

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light∗1

or

Vehicle skid control system warning light∗1

Traction control system off indicator/warninglight∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1or

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1



∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 102 in Section 1−5.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 122 inSection 1−6.

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Overdrive−off indicator light

Slip indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Automatic transmission indicator lights

Snow mode indicator light



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobiliser system 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moon roof 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2



Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master key—This key works in everylock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in theglove box.

To protect things locked in the glove boxwhen you have your vehicle parked, leavethe sub key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend you to write down the keynumber and keep it in safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master key (black)—This key works inevery lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed it to make you a new key withbuilt−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not workin the glove box.

Keys (without engineimmobiliser system)

Keys (with engineimmobiliser system)



A transponder chip for engine immobilisersystem has been filled in the head of themaster and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the systemor start the engine.

To protect things locked in the glove boxwhen you have your vehicle parked, leavethe sub key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle. NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with a key ring restingon the key grip and do not pressthe key ring against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts.

� When starting the engine, do notuse the key with other transponderkeys around (including keys of oth-er vehicles) and do not press otherkey plates against the key grip.Otherwise the engine may not start,or may stop soon after it starts. Ifthis happens, remove the key onceand then insert it again after takingoff other transponder keys (includ-ing keys of other vehicles) from thering or while gripping or coveringthem with your hand to start theengine.



� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder the direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials. KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend you to write down the keynumber and keep it in safe place.



Engine immobiliser system

The engine immobiliser system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The engine will start, only whenthe electronic code in the chip corre-sponds to the registered ID code forthe vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer.

� The indicator light stays on.

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

� The indicator light flashes unsteady.

Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the system,which enables the engine to start. Theindicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the sys-tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobiliser sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, the properoperation of the system cannot beguaranteed.



For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZ RI−14BTYMADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Side doors—

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door locksimultaneously with either front door. Inthe driver’s door lock, turning the keybackward once will unlock the driver’sdoor and twice in succession will unlockall the side doors and back door simulta-neously. In the front passenger’s doorlock, turning the key backward once willunlock all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously.



When the driver’s door is unlocked byturning a key in either of the front doors,the interior light comes on for about 15seconds and then fades out, even if thedoor is not opened. (For further informa-tion, see “Interior lights” on page 92 and“Ignition switch light” on page 93 in Sec-tion 1−4.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

Closing the side door with the lock knobin the lock position will also lock the sidedoor. Be careful not to lock your keys inthe vehicle.

The side door cannot be locked if youleave the key in the ignition switch andthe driver’s door is opened.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side



LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch on the front side.To unlock: Push the switch on the rearside.

All the side doors and back door lock orunlock simultaneously.

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

This feature allows you to lock a reardoor so it can be opened from the outsideonly, not from inside. We recommend us-ing this feature whenever small childrenare in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.



—Wireless remote control

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

Your vehicle has a wireless remotecontrol system that can lock or unlockall the side doors and back door, oractivate the “PANIC” mode from adistance within approximately 1 m (3ft.) of the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDEDOORS AND BACK DOOR

To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches ofthe transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time one beep willbe heard, and the turn signal lights flashonce.

Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or back door isnot securely closed, locking cannot beperformed by the “LOCK” switch and abeep will sound continuously for 10 sec-onds. However, if the key is in the igni-tion, a beep will not sound.

To stop the buzzer, close all the sidedoors and back door securely or push the“UNLOCK” switch.

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,and the turn signal lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the driver’s door is unlocked with awireless remote control transmitter, the in-terior light and ignition switch light comeon for about 15 seconds and then fadeout, even if the door is not opened. (Fordetails, see “Interior lights” on page 92and “Ignition switch light” on page 93 inSection 1−4.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again. At this time one beepwill be heard, and the turn signal lightsflash once.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.



If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the buttonand then push again.

The wireless door locking or unlockingfunction can be erased. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

SWITCHING BEEP SOUND ON AND OFF

You can switch the beep on and off. (Thebeep is on initially and after battery re-placement.)

To switch the beep on and off:

With the driver’s door opened—

1. Insert the ignition key and remove it.

2. Within 5 seconds, insert the ignitionkey again and turn it to the “ON” posi-tion.

3. After 10 seconds, push the same“LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or “PANIC” buttontwice within 10 seconds.Two beep sounds inform you that theprogram has been switched on or off.

If this procedure is not followed exactly,the beep will not operate as expected.

Check the beep ON/OFF operation bypushing the transmitter switch after youfinish this procedure. If the beep does notoperate as expected, repeat this proce-dure from step 1.

“PANIC” SWITCH

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows thehorn intermittently and flashes theheadlights and tail lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, do the following:

� Push the “PANIC” switch once again.

� Unlock any of side door or back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter.

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.



The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

The alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLTRANSMITTER

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter on placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the doors or alarm, oroperate from a normal distance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “REPLACINGTRANSMITTER BATTERY”.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 228 inSection 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, thereis no guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:



� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

REPLACING TRANSMITTER BATTERY

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken thatsmall children do not swallow the re-moved transmitter battery or compo-nents.

NOTICE

� During replacing the transmitterbattery, do not push the “LOCK”and “UNLOCK” switches manytimes.

� When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended bythe manufacturer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by the fol-lowing procedures:

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.



2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put a new transmitter battery with posi-tive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery should be faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the transmitter, orit may interfere with proper opera-tion.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the transmitter battery insertionand that dust or oils do not adhereto the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.



Power windows

The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If both front doors areclosed, they work for 43 seconds evenafter the ignition switch is turned off. Theystop working when the either front door isopened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat-ic closing operation, the window stops andopens half way if something gets caughtbetween the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to make the jam protectionfunction work intentionally.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.



Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.



OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOWFROM OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

The driver’s window can be operatedwith the key inserted in the driver’sdoor key cylinder.

To open: Turn the key fully backward andhold it.

After the door is unlocked, the windowbegins to open. To stop the window part-way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully forward andhold it.

After the door is locked, the window be-gins to close. To stop the window partway,release the key.

This feature can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� Always make sure the heads, handsand other parts of the bodies of alloccupants are kept completely in-side the vehicle before you closethe power windows. If someone’sneck, head or hands gets caught ina closing window, it could result ina serious injury. When anyonecloses the power windows, makesure that he/she operates the win-dows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Never leave small children alone inthe vehicle, especially with the igni-tion key still inserted. They coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended children can be involved inserious accidents.

Back door

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

To open the back door, pull the lock re-lease lever.

When the driver’s door is unlocked byturning a key in either of the front doors,the interior light comes on for about 15seconds and then fades out, even if thedoor is not opened. (For further informa-tion, see “Interior lights” on page 92 and“Ignition switch light” on page 93 in Sec-tion 1−4.)



Operating the power door lock switch orwireless remote control transmitter simul-taneously locks or unlocks the back door(see “Side doors” on page 16 in this sec-tion).

When closing the back door, make sureit is fully closed.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 189 in Section 2 for precautions toobserve in loading luggage.

When closing the back door, use theinside strap for easier reach to theback door.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 189 in Section 2 for precautions inloading luggage.

CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.



Hood

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to itsclip—this prevents rattles. Then lower thehood and make sure it locks into place.If necessary, press down gently on thefront edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood securely from falling downon to your head or body.



NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod toits clip before closing the hood. Clos-ing the hood with the support rod upcould cause the hood to bend.

Theft deterrent system

To deter the vehicle theft, the systemis designed to give an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked or the battery termi-nal is disconnected and then recon-nected when the system is set.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lights, turnsignal lights and interior lights. If any ofthe side doors and back door is unlockedforcibly, all the side doors and back doorwill be automatically locked.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing whenthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch. (See “Engine immobiliser system”on page 15 for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, backdoor and hood.

The indicator light will come on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.



The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will give the alarm under thefollowing conditions:

� If any of the side doors and back dooris unlocked or the hood is forciblyopened without the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter.

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

� Hotwire the ignition.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activating.

If any of the side doors and back door isunlocked without the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter, all the side doorsand back door will be automatically lockedagain.

After one minute, the alarm will automati-cally stop and the indicator light will startflashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingconditions:

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

� Unlock any of the side doors or backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

CANCELLING THE SYSTEM

The system will be cancelled by theabove mentioned 2 ways.

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,the theft deterrent system has beenalarmed. Check to see if there is anyabnormality on your vehicle.

TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The side doors and back door shouldbe locked with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter. Be sure towait until the indicator light starts flash-ing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. Thesystem should activate the alarm.

4. Stopping the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors and hood. When testing on thehood, also check that the system isactivated when the battery terminal isdisconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.



Fuel tank cap

This indicates that the fuel filler dooris on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull thelever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames when refueling.The fumes are flammable.

� When opening the cap, do not re-move the cap quickly. In hot weath-er, fuel under pressure could causeinjury by spraying out of the fillerneck if the cap is suddenly re-moved.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turnthe cap slowly counterclockwise,then pause slightly before removingit. After removing the cap, hang iton the cap hanger.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swooshwhen the cap is opened. When installing,turn the cap clockwise till you hear aclick.

If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.



CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is tightened se-curely to prevent fuel spillage incase of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

Electric moon roof

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use theswitch beside the personal light.

The moon roof works when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position. However,if both front doors are closed, it works for43 seconds even after the ignition switchis turned off. It stops working when eitherfront door is opened.

Sun shade operation—

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDEOPEN” side.

The roof will open and stop at the three−quarters closed position. When you pushthe switch again, the moon roof will openfully. To stop the roof partway, push theswitch on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or“TILT UP” side while the roof is moving.

As driving with the moon roof opened fullywill cause wind throbs, we recommendyou to drive with the moon roof at thethree−quarters closed from the fullyopened position.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.



The roof will fully close. To stop the roofpartway, push the switch on either the“SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP” side.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILTUP” side.To lower: Push the switch on the “SLIDEOPEN” side.

You may stop the moon roof at any de-sired position. The roof will move whilethe switch is being pushed and stop whenreleased except to slide open.

Jam protection function (closing opera-tion only): During closing operation, themoon roof stops and opens half way ifsomething gets caught between the moonroof and frame.

If an impact is given to the moon roof,this function may work without anythingcaught.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury, youmust do the following.

� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be seriously in-jured if the vehicle stops suddenlyor if the vehicle is involved in anaccident.

� Always make sure nobody placeshis/her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening be-fore you close the roof. If some-one’s neck, head or hands getscaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in a serious injury. Whenanyone close the roof, first makesure it is safe to do so.

� Never leave small children alone inthe vehicle, especially with the igni-tion key still inserted. They coulduse the moon roof switches and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended children can be involved inserious accidents.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSSeats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and MirrorsSeats 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrests 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS driver and front passenger airbags 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS side airbags 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt steering wheel 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3



SeatsWhile the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow sitting on top of afolded−down seatback, or in theluggage compartment or cargo area.Persons not properly seated and/orproperly restrained by seat beltscan be severely injured in the eventof emergency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow pas-sengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Severe inju-ries can occur in the event of emer-gency braking or a collision.

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use. The sideairbag inflates with considerablespeed and force; you may be killedor seriously injured.

� Do not use accessories for theseats which cover the parts wherethe side airbags inflate. Such acces-sories may prevent the side airbagsfrom activating correctly, causingdeath or serious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the front seatswith the side airbags. Such changesmay disable the system or causethe side airbags to inflate acciden-tally, resulting in death or seriousinjury. Consult your Toyota dealer ifyou insist on modifications of thiskind.

Adjust the driver’s seat so that the footpedals, steering wheel and instrumentpanel controls are within easy reach ofthe driver.

CAUTION

� Adjustments should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving, as theseat may unexpectedly move andcause the driver to lose control ofthe vehicle.

� When adjusting the seat, be carefulthat the seat does not hit a passen-ger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position,try sliding it forward and backwardto make sure it is locked in posi-tion.

� After adjusting the seatback, exertbody pressure to make sure it islocked in position.

� Do not put objects under the seats.The objects may interfere with theseat−lock mechanism or unexpect-edly push up the seat position ad-justing lever; the seat may suddenlymove, causing the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

Front seats——Front seat precautions (on vehicles with SRS side airbags)

—Seat adjustment precautions



� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. You may catchand injure your hands or fingers.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTINGKNOBS

Turn the knob either way.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats (manual seat)



CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision, avoidreclining the seatback any more thanneeded. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection in a frontal or rearcollision when the driver and the pas-senger are sitting up straight andwell back in the seats. If you arereclined, the lap belt may slide pastyour hips and apply restraint forcesdirectly to the abdomen. Therefore, inthe event of a frontal collision, therisk of personal injury may increasewith increasing recline of the seat-back.

1. SEAT POSITION AND SEAT CUSHIONANGLE/HEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats. It might interfere with the seat−lockmechanism.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH

Move the control switch in the desireddirection.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting front seats(power seat)



CAUTION

To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision, avoidreclining the seatback any more thanneeded. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection in frontal or rear col-lision when the driver and the pas-senger are sitting up straight andwell back in the seats. If you arereclined, the lap belt may slide pastyour hips and apply restraint forcesdirectly to the abdomen. Therefore, inthe event of a frontal collision, therisk of personal injury may increasewith increasing recline of the seat-back.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the switch on either way.

The amount of lumbar support will changeas long as the switch is pushed.

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold thecenter of the lever and pull it up.Then slide the seat further forwardthan the front−most lock position.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver to unlock and push down theseatback.

When returning the seatback upright, becareful not to make yourself hit by theseatback which will bound with consid-erable spring force.

After returning the seat to its originalposition, be certain to replace the headrestraint.

—Flattening seatbacks(manual seat)



CAUTION

� Do not allow passengers to ride onthe flattened seat while driving; usethe seat in the normal position.

� After putting back the seat, trypushing the seat and seatback for-ward and rearward to make sure itis secured in place. Be certain toreplace head restraint.

1. Remove the head restraint. Push theseat position adjusting switch for-ward to slide the seat further for-ward than the front−most lock posi-tion.

2. Move the seatback angle adjustingswitch backward to flatten the seat-back.

After returning the seat to its originalposition, be certain to replace the headrestraint.

—Flattening seatbacks(power seat)



CAUTION

� Do not allow passengers to ride onthe flattened seat while driving; usethe seat in the normal position.

� After putting back the seat, trypushing the seat and seatback for-ward and rearward to make sure itis secured in place. Be certain toreplace head restraint.

CAUTION

� Adjustment should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving.

� When adjusting the seatback, becareful not to hit the seat againsta passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushback your body to make sure it islocked in position.

� When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision orsudden stop:

Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Folding rear seatbacks will enlarge theluggage compartment. See “Luggage stow-age precautions” on page 189 in Section2 for precautions in loading luggage.

—Adjusting rear seats

SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER

Pull the lever up. Then lean back to thedesired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

� Adjustments should not be madewhile the vehicle is moving.

Rear seats——Rear seat precautions



� To reduce the risk of sliding underthe lap belt during a collision,avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen.Therefore, in the event of a frontalcollision, the risk of personal injurymay increase with increasing reclineof the seatback.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushback your body to make sure it islocked in position.

NOTICE

Do not fold the seatback forwardwhile the luggage cover is set.

—Fold−down rear seats

BEFORE FOLD−DOWN REAR SEAT

1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles asshown above the illustration.

2. Make sure the outer seat beltspasses through the hangers whenfolding the rear seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hangers when they are in use.



FOLD−DOWN REAR SEATS

Pull the lock release lever and folddown the seatback.

NOTICE

Do not fold the seatback forwardwhile the luggage cover is set.

Folding down the rear seats will enlargethe luggage compartment. See “Luggagestowage precautions” on page 189 in Sec-tion 2 for precautions in loading luggage.

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision or sud-den stop:

� Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Head restraints

Front

Rear



For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Front head restraints only—On some mod-els, you can also move the front headrestraint forward or backward. If such ad-justment is desired, pull or push the headrestraint.

Rear center head restraint—When an oc-cupant sits on the rear center seat, al-ways pull up the rear center head re-straint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Armrests

To use the armrest, pull it down asshown above.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Seat heaters

To turn on the seat heater, push theswitch.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Push the switch once again to turn theseat heater off.



CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or handicappedpersons

� Persons who have delicate skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat from overheating,do not use the seat heater with ablanket, cushion, or other insulatingobjects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch onwhen the engine is running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 66 for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

Seat belts——Seat belt precautions



Do not allow the child to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. It does not provide sufficientrestraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatbacks toomuch. The seat belts provide maxi-mum protection when the seatbacksare in the upright position. (Referto the seat adjustment instructions.)

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or side doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers—they may severely weaken thebelts. (See “Cleaning the interior”on page 233 in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.



—Front and rear seat belts

Adjust the seat as needed (front seatsonly) and sit up straight and well backin the seat. To fasten your belt, pull itout of the retractor and insert the tabinto the buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 66 in this section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.



CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causeserious injuries in a collision.

Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

CAUTION

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended result. Keep thelap belt positioned as low on hipsas possible.

� For your safety, do not place theshoulder belt under your arm.



To release the belt, press the buckle−re-lease button and allow the belt to re-tract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

The rear seat belt buckles can bestowed when not in use.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed beforeyou fold the seat back. (See “—Fold−downrear seats” on page 42 in this section.)

—Seat belt extenderIf your seat belt cannot be fastened se-curely because it is not long enough, apersonalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer sothat the dealer can order the proper re-quired length for the extender. Bring theheaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-er measurement and selection of length.Additional ordering information is availableat your Toyota dealer.

—Stowing rear seat belt buckles



CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould result in less effectiveness ofthe seat belt restraint system in caseof vehicle accident, increasing thechance of personal injury.

� Never use the seat belt extender ifyou can fasten the seat belt withoutit.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, or foranother person or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended for.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle−release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle−release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the seat belt extender is nottwisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed. It cannotprotect an adult occupant or yourchild from injury.



—Front seat belt pretensioners

The driver and front passenger’s seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact.

When the airbag sensor detects the shockof a severe frontal impact, the front seatbelts are quickly drawn back in by theretractors so that the belts snugly restrainthe front seat occupants.

The front seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated even with no passenger in the frontseat.

Collisions occurring at certain speeds andangles may cause the front seat belt pre-tensioners and SRS airbags not to operateall together.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, front seat beltpretensioner assemblies, inflators, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 102 in Section 1−5.)

The front seat belt pretensioner systemmainly consists of the following compo-nents and their locations are shown in theillustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies

4. Airbag sensor assembly

The front seat belt pretensioners are con-trolled by the airbag sensor assembly. Theairbag sensor assembly consists of a saf-ing sensor and airbag sensor.



When the front seat belt pretensioners areactivated, an operating noise may beheard and a small amount of smoke−likegas may be released. This gas is harm-less and does not indicate that a fire isoccurring.

Once the front seat belt pretensionershave been activated, the seat belt retrac-tors remain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe front seat belt pretensioner as-semblies, airbag sensor or surround-ing area or wiring. Doing any ofthese may cause sudden operation ofthe front seat belt pretensioners ordisable the system, which could re-sult in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious inju-ries.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of thefront seat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole

This front seat belt pretensioner systemhas a service reminder indicator to informthe driver of operating problems. If any ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags orpretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible to service thevehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or the light remains on.

� The light comes on or flashes whiledriving.

� If either front seat belt does not retractor cannot be pulled out due to a mal-function or activation of the relevantfront seat belt pretensioner.



In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front part of the vehicle (shadedin the illustration) was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the front seat belt pretensionersto operate.

� Either front seat belt pretensioner as-sembly or surrounding area isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work together withthe seat belts to help reduce injury byinflating. The SRS front airbags help toreduce injuries mainly to the driver’s orfront passenger’s head or chest caused bydirectly hitting the steering wheel or dash-board. The front passenger airbag is acti-vated even with no passenger in the frontseat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

SRS driver and front passenger airbags



This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS front airbags are oper-ating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, front seat beltpretensioner assemblies, inflators, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 102 in Section 1−5.)

The SRS front airbag system is de-signed to activate in response to a se-vere frontal impact within the shadedarea between the arrows in the illustra-tion.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen impacting straight into a fixed barrierthat does not move or deform.

If the severity of the impact is below theabove threshold level, the SRS front air-bags may not deploy.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if it is involved in an underridecollision (e.g. a collision in which the noseof the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under,the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions at thelower zone of airbag sensor detection andactivation the SRS airbags and front seatbelt pretensioners will not operate all toge-ther.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.



Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not designedto inflate if the vehicle is involved in aside or rear collision, if it rolls over, orif it is involved in a low−speed frontalcollision.

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard material

Falling into or jumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may deploy if aserious impact occurs to the undersideof your vehicle. Some examples areshown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system consists mainly ofthe following components, and their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)


5. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.



In a severe frontal impact, the sensorsdetect deceleration and the system trig-gers the airbag inflators. Then a chemicalreaction in the inflators quickly fills theairbags with non−toxic gas to help restrainthe forward motion of the occupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventany potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, dashboard) may be hot for severalminutes, but the airbags themselves willnot be hot. The airbags are designed toinflate only once.

A crash severe enough to inflate the air-bags may break the windshield as thevehicle buckles. In vehicles with a pas-senger airbag the windshield may also bedamaged by absorbing some of the forceof the inflating airbag.

CAUTION

� The SRS airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver side andfront passenger side seat belt sys-tems. The front seat occupants canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 45 in this sec-tion.



� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing front airbags. An infant or childwho is too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 66 in thissection.

� Never put a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat because the force of therapid inflation of the front passen-ger airbag can cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

Move seat fully back

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to be put onthe front passenger seat only whenit is unavoidable. Always move theseat as far back as possible, be-cause the force of the deployingfront passenger airbag could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� On vehicles with side airbags, donot allow the child to lean againstthe front door or around the frontdoor even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbags inflate,because the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.



� For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page66 in this section.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean over the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use. The front air-bags inflate with considerablespeed and force; you may be killedor seriously injured. Sit up straightand well back in the seat, and al-ways use your seat belt properly.

� Do not allow a child to stand up,or to kneel on the front passengerseat. The front airbag inflates withconsiderable speed and force; thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 66 in this sec-tion.



� Do not put objects or your pets onor in front of the dashboard orsteering wheel pad that houses thefront airbag system. They might re-strict inflation or cause death orserious injury as they are projectedrearward by the force of the deploy-ing airbags. Likewise, the driverand front passenger should nothold things in their arms or ontheir knees.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components, such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, front passen-ger airbag cover, front passengerairbag or airbag sensor assembly.Doing any of these may cause sud-den SRS front airbag inflation ordisable the system, which could re-sult in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag



This SRS front airbag system has aservice reminder indicator to inform thedriver of operating problems. If either ofthe following conditions occurs, this indi-cates a malfunction of the airbags. Con-tact your Toyota dealer as soon as pos-sible to service the vehicle.


� The light comes on while driving.


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front part of the vehicle (shadedin the illustration) was involved in anaccident that was not severe enough tocause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.



SRS side airbags

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags work together with theseat belts to help reduce injury by inflat-ing. The SRS side airbags help to reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s or front pas-senger’s chest. The SRS side airbag onthe passenger seat is activated even withno passenger in the front seat.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seat belt restraintsystem by the driver and front passengerwhen the SRS side airbags are inflated.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags inflate with consid-erable force. To avoid potential deathor serious injury when they inflate,the driver and front passenger must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirback upright and against the seat atall times.

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags are operat-ing properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensor, front seat beltpretensioner assemblies, inflators, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 102 in Section 1−5.)



The SRS side airbag system may notactivate if the vehicle is subjected to acollision from the side at certainangles, or a collision to the side of thevehicle body other than the passengercompartment as shown in the illustra-tion.

The SRS side airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside.

For the safety of all occupants, alwayswear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not designedto inflate if the vehicle is involved in afront or rear collision, if it rolls over,or if it is involved in a low−speed sidecollision.

The SRS side airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.


2. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

3. Side airbag sensors


The SRS side airbag system is controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.



In a severe side impact, the side airbagsensor triggers the side airbag inflators.Then a chemical reaction in the inflatorsquickly fills the airbags with non−toxic gasto help restrain the lateral motion of theoccupants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This gas is nor-mally harmless; however, for those whohave delicate skin, it may cause a minorskin irritation. Be sure to wash off anyresidue as soon as possible to preventany potential skin irritation.

Deployment of the airbags happen in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats may be hot for several min-utes, but the airbags themselves will notbe hot. The airbags are designed to inflateonly once.

CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driverside and front passenger side seatbelt systems. To ensure maximumprotection in an accident, the driverand all passengers in the vehiclemust wear their seat belts properly.Wearing a seat belt properly duringan accident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. Forinstructions and precautions con-cerning the seat belt system, see“Seat belts” on page 45 in this sec-tion.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 66 in thissection.

� Do not allow a child to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the front door or the areaof the seat from which the side air-bag deploys even if he/she isseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the side airbaginflates, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page66 in this section.



� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use. The sideairbag inflates with considerablespeed and force; you may be killedor seriously injured.

� Do not apply excessive weight tothe outer side of the front seats onvehicles with side airbags.

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold things in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not use accessories for theseats which cover the parts wherethe side airbags inflate. Such acces-sories may prevent the side airbagsfrom activating correctly, causingdeath or serious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the front seatswith the side airbags. Such changesmay disable the system or causethe side airbags to inflate acciden-tally, resulting in death or seriousinjury. Consult your Toyota dealer ifyou insist on modifications of thiskind.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.



NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat

This SRS side airbag system has aservice reminder indicator to inform thedriver of operating problems. If either ofthe following conditions occurs, thisindicates a malfunction of the airbags.Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.




� The SRS side airbags have been in-flated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) were involved in an acci-dent that was not severe enough tocause the SRS side airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.



NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Toyota strongly urges the use of childrestraint systems for children smallenough to use them.

The laws of all fifty states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 45 for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops,child must be properly restrainedusing a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,and is put on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never put a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear−facing child restraint systemis put on the front seat.

� Unless it is unavoidable, do not puta child restraint system on thefront seat.

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of the deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions



� On vehicles with side airbags, donot allow the child to lean againstthe front door or around the frontdoor even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag inflates,and the impact could cause deathor serious injury to the child.

� Make sure that you have compliedwith all installation instructions pro-vided by the child restraintmanufacturer and that the system isproperly secured.

—Child restraint systemA child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’sinstructions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

CAUTION

� Never put a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front seat. Inthe event of an accident, the forceof the rapid inflation of the airbagcan cause death or serious injury ifa rear−facing child restraint systemis put on the front seat.

� Unless it is unavoidable, do not puta child restraint system on thefront seat.

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to put onthe front seat only when it is un-avoidable. Always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of the deploying airbag couldcause death or serious injury to thechild.




� After installing the child restraintsystem, make sure it is secured inplace following the manufacturer’sinstructions. If it is not restrainedsecurely, it may cause death or se-rious injury to the child in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 79 in this section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 81 in this section.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Types of child restraintsystem



(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat is used in rear−facingposition only.

CAUTION


—Installation with 3−point type seat belt



� Do not put a rear−facing child re-straint system on the rear seat if itinterferes with the lock mechanismof the front seats. This can causedeath or serious injury to the childand front passenger in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� If your driving position is not satis-factory, do not install the child re-straint system on the left seat.

Same angle

� When installing a child restraintsystem in the rear center position,align both seatbacks at the sameangle. Otherwise, the child restraintsystem cannot be securely re-strained and this may cause seriousinjuries in a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.



CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.


� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from injury. Contact yourToyota dealer immediately. Do notuse the seat until the seat belt isfixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.



CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle−release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat is used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depend-ing on the child’s age and size. Wheninstalling, follow the manufacturer’s in-struction about the applicable child’sage and size as well as directions forinstalling the child restraint system.



CAUTION





� Do not put a rear−facing child re-straint system on the rear seat if itinterferes with the lock mechanismof the front seats. This can causedeath or serious injury to the childand front passenger in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� If your driving position is not satis-factory, do not install the child re-straint system on the left seat.



Same angle


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION






2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted slightly, it cannot be ex-tended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.



4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle−release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat is used in forward−fac-ing position only.


CAUTION





Same angle


1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and child fol-lowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page45 for details.



CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder. Fail-ure to do so could reduce theamount of protection in an accidentand cause serious injuries in a col-lision.

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could cause seri-ous injuries due to sliding underthe lap belt during a collision orother unintended. Keep the lap beltpositioned as low on a child’s hipsas possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.


� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.


2. To remove the child restraint system,press the buckle−release button and al-low the belt to retract.



—Using a top strap

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

Symbol

Anchor brackets

Use the anchor brackets behind the rearseatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for both out-side rear seating positions.

This symbol indicates the location of userready anchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.



2. Open the anchor bracket cover withthe symbol as shown in the illustra-tion.

3. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 66 in this section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

4. Replace the head restraint.

Be sure to close the cover when the an-chor bracket is not in use.



The lower anchorages for the child re-straint system interfaced with theFMVSS225 specification are installed inthe rear seat.

The anchorages are installed in the clear-ance between the seat cushion and seat-back of both outside rear seats.

Child restraint system interfaced with theFMVSS225 specification can be fixed withthese anchorages. In this case, it is notnecessary to fix the child restraint systemwith a seat belt on the vehicle.

Type A Type B

—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages



CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

Type A—

1. Widen the clearance between theseat cushion and seatback a littleand confirm the position of the low-er anchorages below the tag in theseatback.

2. Latch the hooks of lower straps ontothe anchorages and tighten the lowerstraps.

Type B—

1. Widen the clearance between theseat cushion and seatback a littleand confirm the position of the low-er anchorages below the tag in theseatback.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchor-ages.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 79 in this section.)

For the installation details, refer to theinstruction manual equipped with eachproduct.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

� After securing the child restraintsystem, never recline the seat.

� Do not put a child restraint systemon the rear seat if it interferes withthe lock mechanism of the frontseats. This can cause severe injuryto the child and front passenger incase of sudden braking or a colli-sion.

Tilt steering wheel

To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, push down thelock release lever, tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle and returnthe lever to its original position.



CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. It maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Outside rear view mirrors—

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s side.It is a convex mirror with a curved sur-face. Any object seen in a convex mirrorwill look smaller and farther away thanwhen seen in a flat mirror.

On some models, when you push the out-side rear view mirror defogger switch, theheater panels in the outside rear viewmirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-face.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. It may cause thedriver to mishandle the vehicle andan accident may occur resulting indeath or serious injuries.

� Since the mirror surfaces can gethot, keep your hands off them whenthe defogger switch is on.



To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the “L” (left) or “R” (right) switch.

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirror can be adjusted when key is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

—Folding rear view mirrors

The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in restrictedareas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

—Power rear view mirror control

Anti−glare inside rear view mirror



CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. It may cause thedriver to mishandle the vehicle andan accident may occur resulting indeath or serious injuries.

Sun visors—

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the sun visor, remove it from thehook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-tion 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,extend the plate at the end of the visor(to position 3).

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end ofthe sun visor when the visor is in theposition 1. It can cover the anti−glareinside rear view mirror and obstructthe rear view.



—Vanity mirrors

To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe sun visor and open the cover.

On some models, the vanity light comeson when you open the cover.



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lights 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window defogger 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer 96. . .

SECTION 1− 4



HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Toturn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch. If you are going to park for overone week, make sure the headlight switchis off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light system(on some models)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe engine started, even with the lightswitch in the “OFF” position. They will notgo off until the ignition switch is turnedoff.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnthe headlights to full intensity for drivingat night.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light controlsystem)



High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionturned off. To turn them on again, turn thekey to the “ON” position or actuate theheadlight switch. If you are going to parkfor over one week, make sure the head-light switch is off.

Headlights and turn signals (without automatic light control system)



NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights onfor a long period when the engine isnot running.

Daytime running light system(on some models)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe engine started, even with the lightswitch in the “OFF” position. They will notgo off until the ignition switch is turnedoff.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob tothe position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turnthe headlights to full intensity for drivingat night.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out.



Emergency flashers

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the switch onlonger than necessary when the en-gine is not running.

Instrument panel light control

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.



Front fog lights

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

Interior lights

To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any ofthe side doors and back door are opened.The light goes off when all the side doorsand back door are closed.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

With the switch in “DOOR” position, thelight comes on when any of the sidedoors and back door are opened. After allthe side doors are closed, the light re-mains on for about 15 seconds and thenfades out.

However, in the following cases, the lightfades out immediately:

� All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in“ACC” or “ON” position.

� The ignition key is turned to “ACC”,“ON”, or “START” after all the sidedoors and back door are closed.

� All the side doors and back door arelocked when the light is still on.

When the driver’s door is unlocked byturning a key in either of the front doorsor with a wireless remote control transmit-ter, the interior light comes on for about15 seconds and then fades out, even ifthe door is not opened.



The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the door key or wireless re-mote control operation

� Changing the timing for the light turn-ing off

Ignition switch light

For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany of the side doors are opened.

The light remains on for some time afterall the side doors and back door areclosed.

However, in the following cases, the lightsgo off immediately.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in“ACC” or “ON” position.

� The ignition key is turned to “ACC”,“ON”, or “START” after all the sidedoors and back door are closed.

� All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked when the light is stillon.

When the driver’s door is unlocked byturning a key in either of the front doorsor with a wireless remote control transmit-ter, the ignition switch light comes on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out, evenif the door is not opened.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the door key or wireless re-mote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Changing the timing for the light turn-ing off



Personal lights

With moon roof

Without moon roof

To turn on the personal light, push theswitch. To turn the light off, push theswitch once again.

Windshield wipers and washer

To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.



With interval adjuster: The “INT TIME”band lets you adjust the wiping time inter-val when the wiper lever is in the intermit-tent position (position 1). Twist the bandupward to increase the time betweensweeps, and downward to decrease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 267 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Rear window wiper and washer

To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 267 inSection 7−3.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratch theglass.



Rear window defogger

With manual air conditioning controls

With automatic air conditioning controls

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the windowsurface. An indicator light will illuminate toindicate the defogger is operating.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defoggers have operated about 15minutes.

Make sure you turn the defogger off whenthe surfaces are clear. Leaving the defog-ger on for a long time could cause thebattery to discharge, especially duringstop−and−go driving. The defogger is notdesigned for drying rain water or for melt-ing snow.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Type A

Type B

Outside rear view mirror defogger and windshield wiper deicer



To turn on the outside rear view mirrordefogger and windshield wiper deicer,push the switch.


The heater panel in the outside rear viewmirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-face. An indicator light is on when thedefogger is operating.

Type B only—The windshield wiper deiceris also equipped to deice the windshieldwiper blades by operating simultaneouslywith the defogger.

Push the switch once again to turn off thesystem.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the system has operated about 15minutes.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot,keep your hands off them when theswitch is on.

Make sure you turn the system off whenthe mirror surfaces have cleared or thewiper blades have deiced. Leaving thesystem on for a long time could cause thebattery to discharge, especially duringstop−and−go driving. The defogger is notdesigned for drying rain water or for melt-ing snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not operate the systemcontinuously longer than necessary.



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine coolant temperature gauge 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meters 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5



Fuel gauge

Low fuel level warning light

The gauge works when the ignitionswitch is on and indicates the approxi-mate quantity of fuel remaining in thetank.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

� Idling for a long period with the airconditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

Engine coolant temperaturegauge



� Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 213 inSection 4.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates engine speedin thousands of rpm ( revolutions perminute). Use it while driving to selectcorrect shift points and to prevent en-gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fastcauses excessive engine wear and poorfuel economy. Remember, in most casesthe slower the engine speed, the greaterthe fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle getinto the red zone. This may causesevere engine damage.

Odometer and two trip meters

This meter displays the odometer andtwo trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.



3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

To change the meter display, quicklypush and release the knob. The meterdisplay changes in the order from theodometer to trip meter A to trip meterB, then back to the odometer eachtime you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

(a) If parking brakeis off, stopimmediately andcontact Toyotadealer.

(b) Fasten driver’s seat belt.

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(d) Stop and check.

(indicator and buzzer)

(e) Stop and check.

or

Do this.

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seatbelt.

(h) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

or

(g) Fill up tank.

(f) Take vehicle toToyota dealer.

or


Do this.

Low fuellevel warninglight

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers



(j) Stop and check.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealerimmediately.

(i) Close all sidedoors and back door.


Do this.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.and

(two−wheeldrive models)

(o) Remove key.Key reminderbuzzer

(m) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(n) Add washer fluid.


Do this.

(four−wheeldrive models)

(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following caseswhen the ignition key is in the “ON” posi-tion.

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position even after the parking brakeis released.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The light does not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the igni-tion key is in the “ON” position.

� The light does not come on even if theignition key is turned on with the park-ing brake released.



A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, immediately stop your vehicleat a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

� The light does not turn off evenafter the parking brake is releasedwhile the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may notwork properly and your stoppingdistance will become longer. De-press the brake pedal firmly andbring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

� The brake system warning light re-mains on together with the “ABS”warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely un-stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

This light and buzzer remind you tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes andbuzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt isnot fastened. Unless the driver fastens thebelt, the light keeps flashing and thebuzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat BeltReminder Light

This light reminds you to buckle up thefront passenger’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or“START”, the reminder light flashes if apassenger sits in the front passenger seatand does not fasten the seat belt. Howev-er, if a front passenger uses an additionalseat cushion, the light may not flash evenwhen the seat belt is not buckled up.

If luggage load is placed on the frontpassenger seat, depending on its weightand how it is placed on the seat, built−insensors in the seat cushion may detectthe pressure, causing the reminder light tokeep flashing.

(d) Discharge Warning Light

This light warns that the battery is beingdischarged.

If it comes on while you are driving, thereis a problem somewhere in the chargingsystem.

The engine ignition will continue to oper-ate, however, until the battery is dis-charged. Turn off the air conditioning,blower, radio, etc., and drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving if the enginedrive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure WarningLight

This light warns that the engine oil pres-sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you aredriving, pull off the road to a safe placeand stop the engine immediately. Call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.



The light may occasionally flicker whenthe engine is idling or it may come onbriefly after a hard stop. There is nocause for concern if it then goes out whenthe engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil levelis extremely low. It is not designed toindicate low oil level, and the oil levelmust be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with thewarning light on—even for one block.It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on in the followingcases.

a. The fuel tank is completely empty.(See “Fuel gauge” on page 100 in Sec-tion 1−5 for instructions.)

b. The fuel tank cap is not tightened se-curely. (See “Fuel tank cap” on page31 in Section 1−2 for instructions.)

c. There is a problem somewhere in yourengine or automatic transmission elec-trical system.

If it comes on while you are driving incase c, have your vehicle checked/re-paired by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on with the ignition keyturned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system andthe vehicle skid control system do notoperate, but the brake system still oper-ates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.




CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors and back door are completelyclosed.

(j) Automatic Transmission FluidTemperature Warning Light

This light warns that the automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stopthe vehicle at a safe place and put theselector lever in “P”. With the engine id-ling, wait until the light goes off. If thelight goes off, you can start the vehicleagain. If the light does not go off, call aToyota dealer or qualified repair shop forassistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warninglight on may damage the automatictransmission.

(k) SRS Warning Light

This light will come on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.After about 6 seconds, the light will gooff. This means the systems of the air-bag and front seat belt pretensionersare operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side airbag sensors, front seat beltpretensioner assemblies, inflators, warninglight, interconnecting wiring and powersources.

If either of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on.


(l) Vehicle Skid Control System Warn-ing and “TRAC OFF” Indicator/Warning Lights (two−wheel drivemodels)

These lights warn that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle skid control sys-tem or traction control system.

The lights will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off aftera few seconds.

If the “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light come on, thevehicle skid control system and tractioncontrol system do not work. However, asconventional braking operates when ap-plied, there is no problem to continue yourdriving.

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction somewhere inthe parts monitored by the warning lightsystem. Contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible to service the vehicle:

� The “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light do notcome on after the ignition is turned toon.

� The “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light remain onafter the ignition is turned to on.



� The “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light come onwhile driving.

(m) Vehicle Skid Control SystemWarning Light (four−wheel drivemodels)

This light warns that there is a problemsomewhere in the vehicle skid control sys-tem or traction control system.

The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off aftera few seconds.

If the “VSC” warning light comes on, thevehicle skid control system and tractioncontrol system do not work. However, asconventional braking operates when ap-plied, there is no problem to continue yourdriving.


� The “VSC” warning light does not comeon after the ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light remains onafter the ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light comes onwhile driving.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid LevelWarning Light

The light warns that the windshield washerfluid level is too low. Add washer fluid atyour earliest opportunity. (For instructions,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 267 inSection 7−3.)

(o) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer reminds you to remove thekey when you open the driver’s door withthe ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”position.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and low windshieldwasher fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or backdoor.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the engine. All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The “ABS”, “VSC” warninglights, “TRAC OFF” (two−wheel drivemodels) indicator/warning light and slipindicator light go off after a few se-conds. The SRS warning light goes offafter about 6 seconds.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch with steering lock 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction control system 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle skid control system 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6



“START”—Starter motor on. The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 193 in Section3.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessorieson.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radiooperate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steeringwheel is locked. The key can be re-moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn it from“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec-tor lever must be in the “P” position be-fore pushing the key.

Vehicles with engine immobiliser sys-tem—Once you remove the key, the en-gine immobiliser system is automaticallyset. (See “Engine immobiliser system” onpage 15 in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the key mayseem stuck at the “LOCK” position. Tofree it, first be sure the key is pushed allthe way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key gently.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the engine is not running.The battery will discharge and theignition could be damaged.

Ignition switch with steeringlock



Automatic transmissionYour automatic transmission has a shiftlock system to minimize the possibility ofincorrect operation. This means you canonly shift out of “P” position when thebrake pedal is depressed (with the ignitionswitch in “ON” position and the lock re-lease button depressed).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting andkey removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving (with overdrive on)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Selector leverLock release buttonTo prevent misshifting

With the brake pedal depressed, shift while holding the lock release button in. (The ignition switch must be in “ON” position.)

Shift while holding the lockrelease button in.

Shift normally.

Overdrive switch

Snow modebutton



(b) Overdrive switch

You can select either third gear (withoverdrive off) or fourth gear (with over-drive on) by pushing this switch.

To turn the overdrive off, push the switch.The “O/D OFF” indicator light should comeon. To turn the overdrive on again, pushthe switch again. The “O/D OFF” indicatorlight should go off.

Always drive your vehicle with the over-drive on for better fuel economy andquieter driving.

If the engine is turned off when the over-drive is off and restarted, the overdrivewill automatically be on.

Vehicles with cruise control—When thecruise control is being used, even if youdownshift the transmission by pushing andreleasing the overdrive switch, enginebraking will not be enabled because thecruise control is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 122 in thissection.

(c) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “Howto start the engine” on page 194 inSection 3. The transmission must be in“P” or “N”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

When the lever is in the “D” position, theautomatic transmission system will selectthe most suitable gear for running condi-tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-ing, hard towing, etc.

Always turn the overdrive on for betterfuel economy and quieter driving. If theengine coolant temperature is low, thetransmission will not shift into the over-drive gear even with the overdrive on.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(d) Using engine braking

To use engine braking, you can downshiftthe transmission as follows:

� Push the overdrive switch. The “O/DOFF” indicator light will come on andthe transmission will downshift to thirdgear.

� Shift into the “2” position. The trans-mission will downshift to second gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andstronger engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models2AZ−FE engine

112 km/h (70 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1MZ−FE engine

121 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . .



Four−wheel drive models2AZ−FE engine

101 km/h (63 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1MZ−FE engine

113 km/h (71 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Shift into the “L” position. The trans-mission will downshift to first gearwhen the vehicle speed drops down toor lower than the following speed, andmaximum engine braking will be en-abled.

Two−wheel drive models2AZ−FE engine

58 km/h (37 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1MZ−FE engine

58 km/h (37 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models2AZ−FE engine

52 km/h (33 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1MZ−FE engine

54 km/h (34 mph). . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicles with cruise control—When thecruise control is being used, even if youdownshift the transmission by pushing andreleasing the overdrive switch, enginebraking is not enabled because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,see “Cruise control” on page 122 in thissection.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(e) Using “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used forstrong engine braking as described pre-viously.

With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, youcan start the vehicle in motion as with thelever in “D”.

With the selector lever in “2”, the vehiclewill start in first gear and automaticallyshift to second gear.

With the selector lever in “L”, the trans-mission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to over−rev the en-gine. Watch the tachometer to keepengine rpm from going into the redzone. The approximate maximum al-lowable speed for each position isgiven below for your reference:

Two−wheel drive models2AZ−FE engine—

“2” 123 km/h (76 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 69 km/h (43 mph). . . . . . . . .

1MZ−FE engine—“2” 125 km/h (78 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 70 km/h (43 mph). . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models2AZ−FE engine—

“2” 111 km/h (69 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 62 km/h (38 mph). . . . . . . . .

1MZ−FE engine—“2” 117 km/h (73 mph). . . . . . . . “L” 65 km/h (40 mph). . . . . . . . .

� Do not continue hill climbing orhard towing for a long time in the“2” or “L” position. This may causesevere automatic transmission dam-age from overheating. To preventsuch damage, “D” position shouldbe used in hill climbing or hardtowing.



(f) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(g) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(h) Good driving practice

� If the transmission repeatedly shifts upand down between third gear and over-drive when climbing a gentle slope, theoverdrive should be turned off. Be sureto turn the switch on immediately after-ward.

� When towing a trailer, in order to main-tain engine braking efficiency, do notuse overdrive.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the enginerunning. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.

NOTICE

Do not hold the vehicle on an up-grade with the accelerator pedal. Itcan cause the transmission to over-heat. Always use the brake pedal orparking brake.

(i) Driving in snow mode

In the snow mode, the transmission sys-tem shifts up from second gear. Use thismode when starting your vehicle in ice orsnow.

To set the driving pattern to the snowmode, push the switch. In the “ECTSNOW” indicator on the instrument clusteris on. To cancel the snow mode, push theswitch again.

If the engine is turned off with the snowmode is on, the snow mode is cancelledwhen the engine is restarted.



(j) Rocking your vehicle if stuck

CAUTION

If your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then you mayattempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near the ve-hicle. During the rocking operationthe vehicle may suddenly move for-ward or backward as it becomes un-stuck, causing injury or damage tonearby people or objects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the transmission and otherparts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Do not race the engine and avoidspinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

(k) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift automatic transmissionselector lever” on page 227 in Section 4.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps control the spinning of thefront wheels which may occur when ac-celerating on slippery road surfaces,thus assisting driver to control the driv-ing power of the front wheels.

When you turn the ignition switch on, thetraction control system always turns onautomatically, and the slip indicator lightwill go off after about a few seconds.

If the slip indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is turned on, contactyour Toyota dealer.

Leave the system on during ordinary driv-ing so that it can operate when needed.When traction control is applied, the slipindicator light blinks.

Traction control system(two−wheel drive models)



While the “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light come on, thetraction control system cannot be oper-ated.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehicleis started. This means that the tractioncontrol system is in the self−check mode,and does not indicate malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, you may feel vibration or noise ofyour vehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system is func-tioning properly.

When getting the vehicle out of mud ornew snow, etc. the traction control systemwill help operate to prevent the wheelsfrom spinning.

You can turn off the traction controlsystem by pushing the “TRAC OFF”switch. The “TRAC OFF” indicator/warn-ing light will come on. Pushing the“TRAC OFF” switch a second timeturns on the traction control systemagain and the “TRAC OFF” indicator/warning light will go off. At this time,the vehicle skid control also turns offand on simultaneously.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREWARNING


The lights will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.





� The “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light do notcome on after the ignition is turned on.

� The “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light are left onafter the ignition is turned on.


CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower to the front wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which willcause the vehicle to lose traction. Insituations where the road surface iscovered with ice or snow, your ve-hicle should be fitted with snow tiresor tire chains. Always drive at ap-propriate and cautious pace.

The traction control system automatical-ly helps control the spinning of 4wheels which may occur when acceler-ating on slippery road surfaces, thusassisting driver to control the drivingpower of 4 wheels.

When you turn the ignition switch on, thetraction control system always turns onautomatically, and the slip indicator lightwill go off after about a few seconds.


Leave the system on during ordinary driv-ing so that it can operate when needed.When traction control is applied, the slipindicator light blinks.

While the “VSC” warning light comes on,the traction control system cannot be op-erated.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehicleis started. This means that the tractioncontrol system is in the self−check mode,and does not indicate malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-ating, you may feel vibration or noise ofyour vehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes. This indicates the system is func-tioning properly.

When getting the vehicle out of mud ornew snow, etc. the traction control systemwill help operate to prevent the wheelsfrom spinning.

Traction control system(four−wheel drive models)



TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILUREWARNING


The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.



� The “VSC” warning light does not comeon after the ignition is turned on.

� The “VSC” warning light is left on afterthe ignition is turned on.


CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower to 4 wheels cannot be main-tained, even though the traction con-trol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which willcause the vehicle to lose traction. Insituations where the road surface iscovered with ice or snow, your ve-hicle should be fitted with snow tiresor tire chains. Always drive at ap-propriate and cautious pace.

The vehicle skid control system helpsintegrated control of several systemssuch as an anti−lock brake system,brake assist system, traction control,engine control, etc. This system auto-matically controls the output of thebrakes or engine to help prevent thevehicle from skidding when corneringon a slippery road surface or abruptsteering wheel operation occurs.

When you turn the ignition switch on, theslip indicator light will come on. The slipindicator light will go off after about a fewseconds.


Vehicle skid control system(two−wheel drive models)



If the vehicles is going to skid duringdriving, the slip indicator light flashes andan alarm sounds intermittently.

The vehicle skid control system activateswhen the vehicle speed is about morethan 15 km/h (9 mph).

While the “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light come on, thevehicle skid control system cannot be op-erated.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehicleis started. This means that the vehicleskid control is in the self−check mode anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

VEHICLE SKID CONTROL SYSTEMFAILURE WARNING


The lights will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.



� The “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light do notcome on after the ignition is turned toon.

� The “VSC” warning light and “TRACOFF” indicator/warning light are left onafter the ignition is turned to on.




CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle skid control system. Even ifthe vehicle skid control system isoperating, you must always drivecarefully and attentively to avoidserious injury. Reckless driving willresult in an unexpected accident. Ifthe slip indicator light flashes,sounding an alarm sounds, specialcare should be taken while driving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle skid control sys-tem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer.

The vehicle skid control system helpsintegrated control of several systemssuch as an anti−lock brake system,brake assist system, traction control,engine control, etc. This system auto-matically controls the output of thebrakes or engine to help prevent thevehicle from skidding when corneringon a slippery road surface or abruptsteering wheel operation occurs.

When you turn the ignition switch on, theslip indicator light will come on. The slipindicator light will go off after about a fewseconds.


If the vehicles is going to skid duringdriving, the slip indicator light flashes andan alarm sounds intermittently.

The vehicle skid control system activateswhen the vehicle speed is about morethan 15 km/h (9 mph).

While the “VSC” warning light comes on,the vehicle skid control system cannot beoperated.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment for a few seconds when theengine is started or just after the vehicleis started. This means that the vehicleskid control is in the self−check mode anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

Vehicle skid control system(four−wheel drive models)



VEHICLE SKID CONTROL SYSTEMFAILURE WARNING


The light will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to “ON”, and will go off afterabout a few seconds.



� The “VSC” warning light does not comeon after the ignition is turned to on.

� The “VSC” warning light is left on afterthe ignition is turned to on.


CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on the ve-hicle skid control system. Even ifthe vehicle skid control system isoperating, you must always drivecarefully and attentively to avoidserious injury. Reckless driving willresult in an unexpected accident. Ifthe slip indicator light flashes,sounding an alarm sounds, specialcare should be taken while driving.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use the tires otherthan specified, or different type orsize, the vehicle skid control sys-tem may not function correctly.When replacing the tires or wheels,contact your Toyota dealer.



Parking brake

Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light inthe instrument panel remains on until yourelease the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

Cruise controlThe cruise control allows you to cruisethe vehicle at a desired speed over 40km/h (25 mph) even with your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Your cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades within the limits of engineperformance, although a slight speedchange may occur when driving up ordown the grades. On steeper hills, agreater speed change will occur so it isbetter to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.



TURNING ON THE SYSTEM

To operate the cruise control, push the“CRUISE ON−OFF” switch. This turns thesystem on. The indicator light in theinstrument panel shows that you can nowset the vehicle at a desired cruisingspeed. Another push will turn the systemcompletely off.

CAUTION

To avoid accidental cruise control en-gagement, keep the “CRUISE ON−OFF” switch off when not using thecruise control.

SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruise control speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “SET/COAST”direction and release it. This sets the ve-hicle at that speed. If the speed is notsatisfactory, tap the lever up for a fasterspeed, or tap it down for a slower speed.Each tap changes the set speed by 1.6km/h (1.0 mph). You can now take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

You can cancel the preset speed by:

a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL”direction and releasing it.

b. Depressing the brake pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will auto-matically cancel out.

If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the preset speed, the presetspeed will also automatically cancel out.

If the preset speed automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.



RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “RES/ACC” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held up, the vehicle will graduallygain speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “SET/COAST” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “SET/COAST”direction and hold it. Release the leverwhen the desired speed is attained. Whilethe lever is held down, the vehicle speedwill gradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “SET/COAST” direction.

Even if you turn off the overdrive switchwith the cruise control on, engine brakingwill not be applied because the cruisecontrol is not cancelled. To decrease thevehicle speed, reset to a slower speedwith the cruise control lever or depressthe brake pedal. If you use the brakepedal, cruise control is cancelled.

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED

If the preset speed is cancelled by pullingthe control lever or by depressing thebrake pedal, pushing the lever up in the“RES/ACC” direction will restore the speedset prior to cancellation.

However, once the vehicle speed falls be-low about 40 km/h (25 mph), the presetspeed will not be resumed.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes when using thecruise control, press the “CRUISE ON−OFF” switch to turn the system off andthen press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSCar audio systemReference 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car audio system operating hintsts 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7



Reference

Type 1: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player/compact disc player (with compact discauto changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM ETR radio/cassette player/compact disc auto changer

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “FM1·2”, “TAPE” or “CD” toturn on that function without pushing“PWR·VOL”.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM1·2”, “TAPE” or “CD” if thesystem is already on but you want toswitch from one function to another.

Using your audio system— —Some basics



TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Mast type antenna—

To remove: Turn it counterclockwise care-fully.To install: Turn it clockwise securely.

NOTICE

� Mast type antenna:To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed beforedriving your Toyota through an au-tomatic car wash.

� On−glass antenna (built−in on therear window glass):Attaching the film (especially con-ductive or metallic type) on the rearglass will noticeably reduce thesensitivity of the radio.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should be to the right.

NOTICE

Do not oil any part of the player anddo not insert anything other than cas-sette tapes into the slot, or the tapeplayer may be damaged.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. (The player willautomatically eject a disc if the label sideis down.) The compact disc player willplay from track 1 through the end of thedisc.

Type 1—Then it will play from track 1 again.

Type 2—The next disc will be played from track 1.

The “LOAD” button must be pressed toinsert a disc. (See “LOAD” button.)

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a compactdisc into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.



Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallisting that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1



1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station (see “TUNE” knob or“SEEK” button). Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The button num-ber will appear on the display.

To tune in to a preset station: Push thebutton for the station you want. The but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” “FM1·2”).

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette. Push the compact disceject button to eject a compact disc.

After you turn the ignition to “LOCK”, youwill be able to eject a cassette or disc butyou will not be able to reinsert it.

(Program)

Push “ ” to select the other side of acassette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected (“ ” indicates

top side, “ ” indicates bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward buttons)

Cassette Player

Push the fast forward button to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear onthe display. Push the reverse button torewind a tape. “REW” will appear on thedisplay.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the fast forward button or“TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re-winding, push the reverse button or“TAPE”.

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas-sette player will stop and then play thatsame side. If a tape fast forwards com-pletely, the cassette player will play theother side of the tape, using the auto−re-verse feature.

Compact Disc Player

If you want to fast forward or reversethrough a compact disc track, push andhold in the fast forward or reverse button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM

Push “AM” to turn on the radio and selectthe AM band. “AM” will appear on thedisplay.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push“AM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.

CD (Compact Disc)

Push “CD” to switch from radio or cas-sette operation to compact disc operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the compact disc player by pushing“CD”. In both cases, a disc must alreadybe loaded in the player.

When the audio is set into compact discoperation, the display shows the track or,track and disc number currently beingplayed. Each time you push “CD”, thesystem changes to the automatic changer.

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display one of the six followingerror messages.



If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi-cates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambi-ent temperature. Remove the disc or mag-azine from the player and allow the playerto cool down.

If “Err 1” appears on the display, itindicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted up−side down. Clean thedisc or insert it correctly.

If “Err 2” appears on the display, itindicates no disc is loaded inside themagazine. Insert a disc.

If “Err 3” or “Err 4” appears on thedisplay, it indicates there is a trouble in-side the system. Eject the disc or maga-zine. Set the disc or magazine again.

If “OPEn” appears on the display, itindicates the compact disc auto changerlid is open. Close the compact disc autochanger lid.

If the malfunction is not rectified, takeyour vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DISC ��

Compact disc auto changer only—

By using this button, you can select adisc you wish to listen to.

Push either side of the button until thenumber of the disc you want to listen toappears on the display.

CONTROL / MODE (Audio control andmode adjustment)

Manual tone adjustment function—

This knob is used to adjust the tonemanually.

For low−pitch tone adjustment, push“CONTROL / MODE” repeatedly until“BAS” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“BAS −5” to “BAS 5”.

Vehicles with 8 speakers only—for middle−pitch tone adjustment, push “CONTROL /MODE” repeatedly until “MId” appears onthe display. Then turn the knob to suityour preference.

The display will show the range from “MId−5” to “MId 5”.

For high−pitch tone adjustment, push“CONTROL / MODE” repeatedly until“TRE” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“TRE −5” to “TRE 5”.

Sound balance adjustment function—

This knob is also used to adjust thesound balance between the front and rear,and the right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push “CONTROL/ MODE” repeatedly until “FAd” appearson the display. Then turn the knob toadjust the front/rear balance.

The display will show the range from“FAd−F7” to “FAd−R7”.

For left/right adjustment, push “CONTROL/ MODE” repeatedly until “BAL” appearson the display. Then turn the knob toadjust the left/right balance.

The display will show the range from“BAL−L7” to “BAL−R7”.



Dolby� B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push the button marked with the double−Dsymbol. The double−D symbol will appearon the display. Push the button again toturn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used forrecording the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM1·2

Push “FM1·2” to turn on the radio andselect the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” willappear on the display. This system allowsyou to set twelve FM stations, two foreach button.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “FM1·2”. Also,push “FM1·2” to switch from cassette orcompact disc operation to radio operation.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random): Compact Disc Player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on all the com-pact discs in the magazine in random or-der, or only listen to the tracks on aspecific compact disc in random order.

To randomly play the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “RAND”.

“ ” will appear on the display. Thedisc you are listening to will play in ran-dom order. If you hear a beep, you heldthe button too long, and the player willplay all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To randomly play all the tracks in themagazine:Push and hold “RAND” until you hear a

beep. “ ” will appear on the dis-play and the player will perform all thetracks on all the discs in the magazine inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette Player

Push “RPT” while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically berewound and replayed. This process willbe continued until you push the buttonagain to turn off the repeat feature.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact Disc Player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear on thedisplay. If you hear a beep, you held thebutton too long, and the player will repeatthe whole disc. When the track ends, itwill automatically be replayed. This pro-cess will be continued until you push thebutton again to turn off the repeat feature.




Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” until you hear a

beep. “ ” will appear on the display.The player will repeat all the tracks on thedisc you are listening to. When the discends, the player will automatically go backto the top track of the disc and replay.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear abeep. The radio will tune in the next pres-et station up the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To select a station, push“SCAN” again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If youhear a beep, you held the button too long,and the radio will scan the preset sta-tions. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again. To select astation, push “SCAN” again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. If you hear a beep, youheld the button too long, and the playerwill scan the first track of all the discs inthe magazine. To select a track, push“SCAN” again. If the player scanned allthe tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.


Scanning the first track of all the discs inthe magazine:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.“ ·SCAN” will appear on the display andthe player will perform the first track ofthe next disc. To select a disc, push the“SCAN” again. If the player has scannedall the discs, it will stop scanning.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek a station, quickly push and re-lease the “�” or “�” under the “SEEK”.Do this again to find another station.

Cassette Player

By using this button, you can skip up ordown to a different track.

You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.

Push the up or down side of the button.“FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thedisplay.



Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button ten times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

When counting the number of tracks youwant to rewind, remember to count thecurrent track as well. For example, if youwant to rewind to a song that is two be-fore the song you are listening to, pushon the down side of the button until “REW3” appears on the display.

If you have pushed the track button morethan you wanted to, push the other sideof the button. The track number will bereduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of tracksremaining on the current cassette side.

� After the beginning of the tape isreached, the player will automaticallystart playing the same side.

� After the end of the tape is reached,the player will automatically reversesides and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track buttonto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spokenword, live, or classical recordings.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push “TAPE” to switch from radio or com-pact disc operation to cassette operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the cassette player by pushing “TAPE”.In both cases, a cassette must already beloaded in the player.

TRACK (Track up/down button): Compact disc player


Push either side of the track button untilthe number of the track you want to listento appears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, push the down side of the buttonone time, quickly.

TUNE (Tuning)

Your Toyota has an electronic tuning radio(ETR). Turn the knob clockwise to step upthe frequency. Turn the knob counterclock-wise to step down the frequency.



Details of specific buttons, controls, andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallisting that follows.

�Type 2



1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station (see “TUNE” knob or“SEEK” button). Push and hold down thebutton until you hear a beep—this will setthe station to the button. The button num-ber will appear on the display.

To tune in to a preset station: Push thebutton for the station you want. The but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

These systems can store one AM and twoFM stations for each button (The displaywill show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” “FM1·2”).

(Eject button)

Cassette tape

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette.

After you turn the ignition to “LOCK”, youwill be able to eject a cassette, but youwill not be able to reinsert it.

Compact disc

To eject one compact disc only: Push andrelease the compact disc eject button. Ifyou hold the button too long (if the audiosystem is on at this time, you hear abeep.), the mechanism will change to themode for ejecting all the discs loaded inthe changer. You can also eject any spe-cific one of the discs loaded in the chang-er as follows:

1. Push either side of the “DISC” buttonuntil the number of the disc you wantto eject is displayed.

2. Push and release the compact disceject button.

To eject all the discs loaded in the chang-er: Push and hold the compact disc ejectbutton (until you hear a beep when theaudio system is on). The last compactdisc played before pushing the button willbe ejected first. If a disc is left in the slotfor a long time, the function to eject allthe discs will be automatically cancelled.

After you turn the ignition to “LOCK”, youwill be able to eject one compact disconly or all the discs loaded in the chang-er, but you will not be able to reinsert itor them.

(Program)

Push “ ” to select the other side of acassette tape. The display indicates whichside is currently selected (“ ” indicates

top side, “ ” indicates bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast forward buttons)

Cassette Player

Push the fast forward button to fast for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear onthe display. Push the reverse button torewind a tape. “REW” will appear on thedisplay.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the fast forward button or“TAPE”; to stop the tape while it is re-winding, push the reverse button or“TAPE”.

If a tape side rewinds completely, the cas-sette player will stop and then play thatsame side. If a tape fast forwards com-pletely, the cassette player will play theother side of the tape, using the auto−re-verse feature.



Compact Disc Player

If you want to fast forward or reversethrough a compact disc track, push andhold in the fast forward or reverse button.When you release the button, the compactdisc player will resume playing.

AM

Push “AM” to turn on the radio and selectthe AM band. “AM” will appear on thedisplay.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “AM”. Also, push“AM” to switch from cassette or compactdisc operation to radio operation.

CD (Compact Disc)

Push “CD” to switch from radio or cas-sette operation to compact disc operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the compact disc player by pushing“CD”. In both cases, a disc must alreadybe loaded in the player.

When the audio is set into compact discoperation, the display shows the track or,track and disc number currently beingplayed.

If the player or another unit equipped withthe player malfunctions, your audio systemwill display one of the six following errormessages.

If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indi-cates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambi-ent temperature. Remove the disc or mag-azine from the player and allow the playerto cool down.

If “Err 1” appears on the display, itindicates the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted up−side down. Clean thedisc or insert it correctly.

If “Err 2” appears on the display, itindicates no disc is loaded inside themagazine. Insert a disc.

If “Err 3” or “Err 4” appears on thedisplay, it indicates there is a trouble in-side the system. Eject the disc or maga-zine. Set the disc or magazine again.

If “OPEn” appears on the display, itindicates the compact disc auto changerlid is open. Close the compact disc autochanger lid.

If the malfunction is not rectified, takeyour vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

CONTROL / MODE (Audio control andmode adjustment)

Manual tone adjustment function—

This knob is used to adjust the tonemanually.

For low−pitch tone adjustment, push“CONTROL / MODE” repeatedly until“BAS” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“BAS −5” to “BAS 5”.

For middle−pitch tone adjustment, push“CONTROL / MODE” repeatedly until “MId”appears on the display. Then turn theknob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from “MId−5” to “MId 5”.

For high−pitch tone adjustment, push“CONTROL / MODE” repeatedly until“TRE” appears on the display. Then turnthe knob to suit your preference.

The display will show the range from“TRE −5” to “TRE 5”.



Sound balance adjustment function—

This knob is also used to adjust thesound balance between the front and rear,and the right and left speakers.

For front/rear adjustment, push “CONTROL/ MODE” repeatedly until “FAd” appearson the display. Then turn the knob toadjust the front/rear balance.

The display will show the range from“FAd−F7” to “FAd−R7”.

For left/right adjustment, push “CONTROL/ MODE” repeatedly until “BAL” appearson the display. Then turn the knob toadjust the left/right balance.

The display will show the range from“BAL−L7” to “BAL−R7”.

DISC ��

By using this button, you can select adisc you wish to listen to.

Push either side of the button until thenumber of the disc you want to listen toappears on the display.

Dolby� B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push the button marked with the double−Dsymbol. The double−D symbol will appearon the display. Push the button again toturn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used forrecording the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM1·2

Push “FM1·2” to turn on the radio andselect the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2” willappear on the display. This system allowsyou to set twelve FM stations, two foreach button.

If the audio system is off, you can turnon the radio by pushing “FM1·2”. Also,push “FM1·2” to switch from cassette orcompact disc operation to radio operation.

LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc auto changerwhich is integrated with the radio and cas-sette player. This compact disc autochanger can store up to 6 discs.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

Loading one compact disc only—

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button. If you holdthe button too long (if the audio systemis on at this time, you hear a beep.), themechanism will change to the mode forloading multiple compact discs. Afterpushing the button, insert a compact disc.At this time, the indicators on both sidesof the slot are flashing. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will closeand the indicators will stop flashing.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.



Loading multiple compact discs—

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold (until you hear a beep when the au-dio system is on). After pushing the but-ton, insert the first compact disc. At thistime, the indicators on both sides of theslot are flashing. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close and theindicators will stop flashing. After a fewseconds, the shutter will automaticallyopen again so the next disc can be in-serted. The same process can be appliedfor loading the rest of the discs.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random): Compact Disc Player

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on all the com-pact discs in the magazine in random or-der, or only listen to the tracks on aspecific compact disc in random order.

To randomly play the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “RAND”.“ ” will appear on the display. Thedisc you are listening to will play in ran-dom order. If you hear a beep, you heldthe button too long, and the player willplay all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To randomly play all the tracks in themagazine:Push and hold “RAND” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the displayand the player will perform all the trackson all the discs in the magazine in ran-dom order. To turn off the random feature,push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette Player

Push “RPT” while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically berewound and replayed. This process willbe continued until you push the buttonagain to turn off the repeat feature.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact Disc Player

There are two repeat features—You caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear on thedisplay. If you hear a beep, you held thebutton too long, and the player will repeatthe whole disc. When the track ends, itwill automatically be replayed. This pro-cess will be continued until you push thebutton again to turn off the repeat feature.

Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” until you hear abeep. “ ” will appear on the display.The player will repeat all the tracks on thedisc you are listening to. When the discends, the player will automatically go backto the top track of the disc and replay.This process will be continued until youpush the button again to turn off the re-peat feature.



SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear abeep. The radio will tune in the next pres-et station up the band, stay there for 5seconds, and then move to the next pre-set station. To select a station, push“SCAN” again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release “SCAN”. If youhear a beep, you held the button too long,and the radio will scan the preset sta-tions. The radio will find the next stationup the station band, stay there for 5 se-conds, and then scan again. To select astation, push “SCAN” again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”will appear on the display and the playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. If you hear a beep, youheld the button too long, and the playerwill scan the first track of all the discs inthe magazine. To select a track, push“SCAN” again. If the player scanned allthe tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.

Scanning the first track of all the discs inthe magazine:Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“ ·SCAN” will appear on the display andthe player will perform the first track ofthe next disc. To select a disc, push the“SCAN” again. If the player has scannedall the discs, it will stop scanning.

SEEK (Seeking)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek a station, quickly push and re-lease the “�” or “�” under the “SEEK”.Do this again to find another station.

Cassette Player


You can skip up to nine tracks at a time.

Push the up or down side of the button.“FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on thedisplay.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the display reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button ten times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

When counting the number of tracks youwant to rewind, remember to count thecurrent track as well. For example, if youwant to rewind to a song that is two be-fore the song you are listening to, pushon the down side of the button until “REW3” appears on the display.



If you have pushed the track button morethan you wanted to, push the other sideof the button. The track number will bereduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of tracksremaining on the current cassette side.

� After the beginning of the tape isreached, the player will automaticallystart playing the same side.

� After the end of the tape is reached,the player will automatically reversesides and start playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track buttonto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spokenword, live, or classical recordings.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push “TAPE” to switch from radio or com-pact disc operation to cassette operation.If the audio system is off, you can turnon the cassette player by pushing “TAPE”.In both cases, a cassette must already beloaded in the player.

TRACK (Track up/down button): Compact disc player


Push either side of the track button untilthe number of the track you want to listento appears on the display. If you want toreturn to the beginning of the currenttrack, push the down side of the buttonone time, quickly.

TUNE (Tuning)

Your Toyota has an electronic tuning radio(ETR). Turn the knob clockwise to step upthe frequency. Turn the knob counterclock-wise to step down the frequency.

NOTICE

To ensure the correct audio systemoperation:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio system.

� Do not put anything other than acassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

� The use of cellular phone inside ornear the vehicle may cause a noisefrom the speakers of the audio sys-tem which you are listening to.However, this does not indicate amalfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Car audio system operating hints



Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere–especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

� A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

� Low−quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto−reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

� Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

� Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

� Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

� Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.



CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER AND DISCS

� Use only compact discs labeled asshown above. CD−R (CD−Recordable),CD−RW (CD−Re−writable) and personalcomputer use CD−ROMs may not beplayable on your compact disc player.

� Your compact disc player is intendedfor use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player from working.On hot days, use the air conditioningto cool the vehicle interior before youlisten to a disc.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer, you may not hear any soundeven though your compact disc playerappears to be working. Remove thedisc from the player and wait until itdries.



� Your automatic changer or compactdisc player cannot play special shapedor low−quality compact discs such asthose shown here. Do not use them asthe player could be damaged.

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.

CAUTION

Compact disc players use an invisiblelaser beam which could cause hazard-ous radiation exposure if directedoutside the unit. Be sure to operatethe player correctly.



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSAir conditioning systemManual air conditioning system

Controls 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic air conditioning systemControls 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side vents 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 8



1. Air intake selector

2. “A/C” button

3. Air flow selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Fan speed selector

Manual air conditioning system— —Controls



Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedblow.



Air intake selector

The air intake selector button is used toswitch the air intake FRESH mode thatdraws outside air into the system andRECIRCULATED mode that recirculatesthe air inside vehicle.

To turn the air source to RECIRCULATEDmode, press the button. The indicator willcome on. To turn the air source to FRESHmode, press the button again. The indica-tor will go off.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.



—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips� To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.



� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—FLOOR Air conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—OFF



Defogging

The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat; COLD (blue zone) tocool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air intakeselector button once again.

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield



(red zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.


� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.



1. Air intake selector

2. “MODE” button (air flow selector)

3. Fan speed selector

4. “A/C” button

5. “OFF” button

6. Windshield air flow button

7. “AUTO” button

8. Temperature selector

Automatic air conditioning system——Controls



“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

To turn off the automatic operation, pressthe “OFF” button.

Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the air condi-tioning system.

“MODE” button (air flow selector)

Push the “MODE” button to select thevents used for air flow.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from theinstrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.



Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents and theFRESH mode is automatically set. Thissetting clears the front view more quickly.


Pressing the button once again returns theair flow mode to the last one used.

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defroster−linked air condition-ing. This is to clean up the front viewmore quickly.

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,pressing another air flow button turns offthe air conditioning.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “Air flow selector settings” describedbelow.

Air intake selector

The air intake selector button is used toswitch the air intake FRESH mode thatdraws outside air into the system andRECIRCULATED mode that recirculatesthe air inside vehicle.

To turn the air source to RECIRCULATEDmode, press the button. The indicator willcome on. To turn the air source to FRESHmode, press the button again. The indica-tor will go off.

If the engine coolant temperature becomesextremely high, RECIRCULATE mode willautomatically be selected. This is not amalfunction. When the engine coolant tem-perature is lowered, the previous modewill resume.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.



“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.



—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips� To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.



� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating


For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards WARM

(to the right)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—ON


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.



Ventilation



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting—

—The inside of the windshield



Temperature—Towards WARM(to the right) to heat;COLD (to the left) tocool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD



(to the right) to heat;COLD (to the left) tocool


When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.


Pressing the windshield button turns onthe defroster−linked air conditioning. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.


� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield



Temperature—Towards WARM(to the right)






(to the right) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.


Pressing the windshield button turns onthe defroster−linked air conditioning. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.


� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

Side vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe side vents. The side vents may beopened or closed as shown.



OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLSOther equipmentMulti−information display 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cigarette lighter and ashtray 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary box 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holderss 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holderss 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9



Multi−information display

Air conditioning system on—

Air conditioning system off—

The multi−information display indicatesthe following information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Average vehicle speed

3. Average fuel consumption

4. Instantaneous fuel consumption

5. Driving time

6. Air conditioning system on—The airconditioned temperature is displayed.Air conditioning system off—The airconditioned temperature is not dis-played.

Every time you push the “INFO” button,the display toggles through this informa-tion.

The displayed values in the multi−informa-tion display indicate general driving condi-tions. Accuracy varies with driving habitsand road conditions.

You can adjust the air conditioned temper-ature while the multi−information is operat-ing. 5 seconds has been passed after ad-justing the temperature or pushing “INFO”button, the display will be back to themulti−information display.

1. Outside temperature(“OUTSIDE TEMP”)

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed temperature ranges from−22�F (−30�C) up to 122�F (50�C).

If there is some abnormality in the con-nection of the outside air temperature sen-sor, “−−�F” (“−−�C”) will appear on thedisplay. If “−−�F” (“−−�C”) appears on thedisplay, contact your Toyota dealer.

There may be a case that “−−�F” (“−−�C”)appears momentarily when the ignition isquickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if itgoes out soon.

2. Average vehicle speed(“AVG MPH” or “AVG km/h”)

Average vehicle speed is calculated anddisplayed based on total driving dis-tance and total driving time with theengine running.

The displayed value is updated every 10seconds.

To reset the calculation, push the “INFO”button for more than 1 second.



3. Average fuel consumption (“AVG MPG” or “AVG L/100 km”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the engine running.


To reset the calculations, push the “INFO”button for more than 1 second.

4. Instantaneous fuel consumption (“MPG” or “L/100 km”)

The instantaneous fuel consumption iscalculated and displayed based on dis-tance and fuel consumption for 1 sec-onds with the engine running.


Note that an accurate figure may not beshown in the following cases.

� When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running, the display will indicatethe extremely high fuel consumption.

� When the vehicle is driving down along slope, applying the engine brake,the display will indicate the extremelylow fuel consumption.

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.

5. Driving time(“E/T”)

The elapsed time after the engine startsis displayed.

When the engine is started, driving timeis counted from 0:00. Up to 11:59 (11hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed.When the driving time exceeds 11:59, thecounter returns to 0:00.

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.

Clock

The digital clock indicates the time.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).



Cigarette lighter

Ashtray

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

To use the cigarette lighter, press it in.When it becomes heated, it automatical-ly pops out ready for use.

If the engine is not running, the key mustbe in the “ACC” position.

Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin.

Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter orequivalent for replacement.

ASHTRAY

To use the ashtray, pull it out.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, push it backin completely.

To remove the ashtray, press down on thelock spring plate and pull out.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always completely closethe ashtray after using it.

Power outlets

Front

Rear

Cigarette lighter and ashtray(on some models)



The power outlets are designed forpower supply for car accessories.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12V/120W (front and rear outlets to-gether).

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not use the poweroutlets longer than necessary whenthe engine is not running.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting a foreign object other thanthe appropriate plug that fits theoutlet, or allowing any liquid intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Glove box

To use the glove box, do this.

To open: Pull the lever.

With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on when theglobe box is open.

To lock: Insert the master key and turn itclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Garage door opener

The garage door opener (HomeLink�

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink� and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.



(a) Programming the HomeLink�

The HomeLink� in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand−held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/Pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program.

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand−held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink�” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.



The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/Program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand−held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink�

To operate the HomeLink�, press theappropriate HomeLink� button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink�

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink�

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.



CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink�

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er, which cannot detect an object,signaling the door to stop and re-verse, does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS−210 of theIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including in-terference that may cause undesired op-eration.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC andIndustry Canada DOC/MPAC rules.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuse’s authority to operate the device.

To use the box, push down the knoband pull the lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

Auxiliary box (instrument panel)



To use the box, pull out while holdingthe lever.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Do not use this auxiliary box as anashtray.

To use the box, pull up the strap.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary box closedwhile driving.

To use the box, open it as shownabove.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a suddenstop, always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� As this holder is designed for hold-ing a light object, do not place anyheavy objects in it. Heavy objectsmay cause the holder to open andcontents to fly out resulting in inju-ries.

Auxiliary box (instrument panel—on some models)

Auxiliary box (luggage compartment)

Auxiliary box (on the ceiling)



NOTICE

During hot weather, the interior of thevehicle becomes very hot. Do notleave anything flammable or deform-able such as a lighter, glasses, etc.inside.

Cup holders

The cup holders are designed for hold-ing cups or drink−cans securely.

To use the holder, pull it out.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, keep the cup holderclosed when it is not in use.



Bottle holders

The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

NOTICE

When using the bottle holder, put thebottle with a cap. Otherwise, the liq-uid will spill over when opening orclosing the door.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

Tie−down hooks

To secure your luggage, use the tie−downhooks as shown above.

See “Luggage stowage precautions” onpage 189 in Section 2 for precautions inloading luggage.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks folded in place on thefloor when not in use.

NOTICE

Do not use the seat anchors insteadof the tie−down hooks.



Luggage coverUSING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Hang the front hooks of the luggagecover to the claws on the back ofthe rear seats.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover andhook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggagecover. Such items may be thrownabout and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking oran accident.

REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To remove the luggage cover, detach itshooks from the back of rear seats.Then, retract and release both ends,and lift the luggage cover out.

After you remove the luggage cover, placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent passengersfrom injury in the event of a sudden stopor accident.



Roof luggage carrier

Cross rails

Roof rails

The roof luggage carrier consists ofroof rails and sliding cross rails.

Upperknob

Side knobs

ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF CROSSRAILS:

1. Turn the upper and side knobs coun-terclockwise to loosen the crossrails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the appropri-ate position for loading the luggagesand turn the side knobs clockwise totighten the cross rails securely.

Vehicles with electric moon roof—Thereare cross rail stoppers on the roof railswhich help you prevent the cross railsbeing touched with the tilted up moonroof.

NOTICE

Vehicles with electric moon roofonly—Do not remove the cross railstoppers, or the moon roof may bedamaged when it is tilted.



3. In order to fix the cross rails to theappropriate length, turn the upperknobs clockwise after tightening allof the side knobs.

CAUTION

Make sure the cross rails are fixedsecurely by pushing forward and rear-ward them. Failure to do so maycause an unexpected accident or se-vere injury in the event of emergencybraking or a collision.

Follow the manufacture’s instructions andprecautions when installing the attach-ments or their equivalent.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-gage carrier, observe the following:

� Place the cargo so that its weightis distributed evenly between thefront and rear axles.

� If loading long or wide cargo, neverexceed the vehicle overall length orwidth. (See “Dimensions andweight” on page 274 in Section 8for information on your vehicleoverall length and width.)

� Before driving, make sure the cargois securely fastened on the roofluggage carrier.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

� If driving for a long distance, onrough roads, or at high speeds,stop the vehicle now and then dur-ing the trip to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

� Do not exceed 45 kg (100 lb.) cargoweight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be carefulnot to scratch the surface of themoon roof.



Floor mat

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the floor carpet and floor mat have ahole, then it is designed for use with alocking clip. Fix the floor mat with lockingclip into the hole in the floor carpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.



INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR TOYOTAOff−road vehicle precautions 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break−in period 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel pump shut off system 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converter 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium−tipped spark plugs 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage stowage precautions 189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited−slip differential 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2



Off−road vehicle precautionsThis vehicle belongs to the utility ve-hicle class, which has higher groundclearance and narrower tread in relationto the height of its center of gravity tomake it capable of performing in a widevariety of off−road applications. Specificdesign characteristics give it a highercenter of gravity than ordinary passen-ger cars. This vehicle design featurecauses this type of vehicle to be morelikely to rollover. And, utility vehicleshave a significantly higher rollover ratethan other types of vehicles. An advan-tage of the higher ground clearance isa better view of the road allowing youto anticipate problems. It is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as ordinary passenger cars anymore than low−slung sports cars de-signed to perform satisfactorily underoff−road conditions. Therefore, sharpturns at excessive speeds may causerollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-vers, if at all possible. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or vehiclerollover causing death or seriousinjury.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.



� Always slow down in gusty cross-winds. Because of its profile andhigher center of gravity, your ve-hicle is more sensitive to sidewinds than an ordinary passengercar. Slowing down will allow you tohave better control.

� When driving off−road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

� Do not drive horizontally acrosssteep slopes. Driving straight up orstraight down is preferred. Your ve-hicle (or any similar off−road ve-hicle) can tip over sideways muchmore easily than forward or back-ward.

Break−in periodDrive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Do not drive over 88 km/h (55 mph).

� Run the engine at moderate speed be-tween 2000 and 4000 rpm.

� Avoid full−throttle starts.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not drive for a long time at anysingle speed, either fast or slow.

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FuelFUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.



OCTANE RATING

2AZ−FE engine: Select Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

1MZ−FE engine: Select Octane Rating87 (Research Octane Number 91) orhigher. For improved vehicle perfor-mance, the use of premium unleadedgasoline with an Octane Rating 91 (Re-search Octane Number of 96) or higheris recommended.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating or research octane number lowerthan stated above will cause persistentheavy knocking. If it is severe, this willlead to engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, now and then, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is no needof concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of three categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 3 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.



SULFUR IN GASOLINE

If your vehicle is certified to CaliforniaEmission Regulations, the vehicle isdesigned to operate on Californiacleaner burning gasoline (CBG) thatcontains lower sulfur. If you cannot useCalifornia CBG, your emission controlsystem may suffer damage and turn onthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp.

If the malfunction is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveability problems occur (poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 Imp. gal.)

Fuel pump shut off systemThe fuel pump shut off system stops sup-plying fuel to the engine to minimize therisk of fuel leakage when the engine stallsor an airbag inflates upon collision. Torestart the engine after the fuel pump shutoff system activates, turn the ignitionswitch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and startit.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehiclebefore restarting the engine. If youfind that liquid has leaked onto theground, it is the fuel system hasbeen damaged and it is in need ofrepair. In this case, do not restart theengine.



Operation in foreign countriesIf you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Three−way catalytic converter

2AZ−FE engine

1MZ−FE engine

The three−way catalytic converter is anemission control device installed in theexhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not idle or park your vehicleover anything that might burn easi-ly such as grass, leaves, paper orrags.



NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

� Do not allow the engine to run atidle speed for more than 20 min-utes.

� Avoid racing the engine.

� Do not push−start or pull−start yourvehicle.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel systems could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

Engine exhaust cautions

CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the engine in a garageor enclosed area except for thetime needed to drive the vehicle inor out. The exhaust gases cannotescape, making this a particularlydangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the engine run-ning. If it is unavoidable, however,do so only in an unconfined areaand adjust the heating or coolingsystem to force outside air into thevehicle.



� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� Keep the back door closed whiledriving. An open or unsealed backdoor may cause exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, drive with the windowsopen and the back door closed.Have the cause immediately locatedand corrected.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

Facts about engine oil consumption



The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 252 in Section 7−2.

Iridium−tipped spark plugs

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugsand do not adjust gaps for your en-gine performance and smooth drivabil-ity.

Brake systemThe tandem master cylinder brake systemis a hydraulic system with two separatesub−systems. If either sub−system shouldfail, the other will still work. However, thepedal will be harder to press, and yourstopping distance will be longer. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only asingle brake system. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum topower−assist the brakes. If the engineshould quit while you are driving, you canbring the vehicle to a stop with normalpedal pressure. There is enough reservedvacuum for one or two stops—but nomore!



CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if theengine stalls. Each push on thepedal uses up your reserved vacu-um.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willbe longer.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(with “ABS” warning light)

The anti−lock brake system is designedto help prevent lock−up of the wheelsduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces. This assists inproviding directional stability and steer-ing performance of the vehicle underthese circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti−lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking performan-ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-erative after the vehicle has acceleratedto a speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad surfaces such as on the manholecover, the steel plate under the construc-tion, joints in the bridge, etc. on a rainyday tends to activate the anti−lock brakesystem.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondswhen the engine is started or just afterthe vehicle is started. This means that theanti−lock brake system is in the self−check mode, and does not indicate a mal-function.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-tivated, the following conditions mayoccur. They do not indicate a malfunc-tion of the system:

� You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-tem operating and feel the brake pedalpulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. Youmay also hear the motor sound in theengine compartment even after the ve-hicle is stopped.

� At the end of the anti−lock brake sys-tem activation, the brake pedal maymove a little forward.



CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lockbrake system: Although the anti−lockbrake system assists in providing ve-hicle control, it is still important todrive with all due care and maintaina moderate speed and safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you, be-cause there are limits to the vehiclestability and effectiveness of steeringwheel operation even with the anti−lock brake system on.

If tires grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-signed to shorten the stopping dis-tance: Always drive at the moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you.Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake system, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size atappropriate pressure: The anti−lockbrake system detects vehicle speedsusing the speed sensors for respec-tive wheels’ turning speeds. The useof tires other than specified may failto detect the accurate turning speedresulting in a longer stopping dis-tance.

Type A

Type B



“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system and the brake assistsystem work properly, the light turns offafter a few seconds. Thereafter, if thesystem malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system, the brake assistsystem, the traction control system andthe vehicle skid control system do notoperate, but the brake system still oper-ates conventionally.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light is off), theanti−lock brake system does not operateso that the wheels could lock up duringa sudden braking or braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

If either of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, or remains on.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.


CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the brake system warn-ing light, immediately stop your ve-hicle at a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding−down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding−down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

If you slam the brakes on such as inan emergency or apply the brakes morefirmly than usual such as when de-scending the hill with the designatednumber of occupants in the vehicle, thebrake assist system provides morepowerful braking.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-erful braking will be applied. At this time,you may hear a sound in the enginecompartment and feel the vibrations of thebrake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-tive after the vehicle has accelerated toa speed in excess of approximately 10km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when thevehicle decelerates to a speed belowapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

For an explanation of this system’s warn-ing light, see “Service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers” on page 102 in Sec-tion 1−5.



Brake pad wear limit indicators

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Luggage stowage precautionsWhen stowing luggage or cargo in thevehicle, observe the following:

� Put luggage or cargo in the luggagecompartment when at all possible. Besure all items are secured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as far for-ward as possible helps maintain bal-ance.

� For better fuel economy, do not carryunneeded weight.

CAUTION

� To prevent luggage or packagesfrom sliding forward during braking,do not stack anything in the lug-gage compartment higher than theseatbacks. Keep luggage or pack-ages low, as close to the floor aspossible.

� Never allow anyone to ride in theluggage compartment. It is not de-signed for passengers. They shouldride in their seats with their seatbelts properly fastened. Otherwise,they are much more likely sufferserious bodily injury, in the eventof sudden braking or a collision.

� Do not place anything on the flat-tened seat, or it may slide forwardduring braking.

� Do not place anything on the lug-gage cover. Such items may bethrown about and possibly injurepeople in the vehicle during suddenbraking or an accident. Secure allitems in a safe place.

� Do not drive with objects left ontop of the instrument panel. Theymay interfere with the driver’s fieldof view. Or they may move duringsharp vehicle acceleration or turn-ing, and impair the driver’s controlof the vehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE

Do not load the vehicle beyond thevehicle capacity weight specified onpage 274 in Section 8.



Limited−slip differentialSome Toyotas are equipped with a lim-ited−slip differential. If one rear wheel be-gins to spin, the limited−slip differential isdesigned to aid traction by automaticallytransmitting driving force to the other rearwheel. If you are not sure whether yourvehicle is equipped with one, you can askyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by a jack.The vehicle could be driven off thejack and could pose a danger or re-sult in serious injury.

NOTICE

Use only a spare tire of the samesize, construction and load capacityas the original tires on your Toyotabecause damage to the limited−slipdifferential could possibly occur withanother tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Regulation Label.

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber



—Engine number

2AZ−FE engine

1MZ−FE engine

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown.

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 56mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

Theft prevention labels(except for Canada)



Suspension and chassis

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Types of tiresDetermine what kind of tires your ve-hicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high−speed capabilitytires best suited to highway driving underdry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the sametraction performance as snow tires, sum-mer tires are inadequate for driving onsnow−covered or icy roads. For driving onsnow−covered or icy roads, we recom-mend using snow tires. If installing snowtires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to providebetter traction in snow and to be adequatefor driving in most winter conditions, aswell as for use all year round.

All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performance comparedwith snow tires in heavy or loose snow.Also, all season tires fall short in accel-eration and handling performancecompared with summer tires in highwaydriving.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all seasontires on your vehicle as this cancause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of con-trol.

� Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designated tires, andnever mix tires or wheels of thesizes different from the originals.



STARTING AND DRIVINGBefore starting the engine 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the engine 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off−road driving precautions 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 206. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3



Before starting the engine1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, head restraintheight and steering wheel angle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all side doors and back door.

5. Fasten seat belts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If youneed to restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, put the selector le-ver in “N”. A starter safety device willprevent the starter from operating if theselector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

(b) Starting the engineBefore starting the engine, be sure to fol-low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-tial multiport fuel injection system in yourengine automatically controls the properair−fuel mixture for starting. You can starta cold or hot engine as follows:

1. With your foot off the accelerator ped-al, crank the engine by turning the keyto “START”. Release it when the en-gine starts.

2. After the engine runs for about 10 se-conds, you are ready to drive.

If the weather is below freezing, let theengine warm up for a few minutes beforedriving.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page210 in Section 4.

How to start the engine— (a) Before cranking



NOTICE

� Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

� Do not race a cold engine.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, have theengine checked immediately.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage result-ing in tire bursts.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the engine is running.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, up-shifting, downshifting or braking ona slippery surface. Sudden accelera-tion or engine braking, could causethe vehicle to spin or skid.

Tips for driving in various conditions



� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

Off−road driving precautionsWhen driving your vehicle off−road, pleaseobserve the following precautions to en-sure your driving enjoyment and to helpprevent the closure of areas to off−roadvehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas whereoff−road vehicles are permitted to trav-el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’spermission before entering private prop-erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-tions are wet, driving techniques shouldbe changed or travel delayed to pre-vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii andPuerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertainingto driving your vehicle off−road, consultthe following organizations.

� State and Local Parks and RecreationDepartments

� State Motor Vehicle Bureau

� Recreational Vehicle Clubs

� U.S. Forest Service and Bureau ofLand Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� Drive carefully when off the road.Do not take unnecessary risks bydriving in dangerous places.

� Do not grip the steering wheelspokes when driving off−road. Abad bump could jerk the wheel andinjure your hands. Keep both handsand especially your thumbs on theoutside of the rim.

� Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving insand, mud, water or snow.

� After driving through tall grass,mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., checkthat there is no grass, bush, paper,rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering ortrapped on the underbody. Clear offany such matter from the under-body. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adheringto the underbody, a breakdown orfire could occur.



� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mo-ving.

� When driving off−road or in ruggedterrain, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns,strike objects, etc. This may causeloss of control or vehicle rollovercausing death or serious injury. Youare also risking expensive damageto your vehicle’s suspension andchassis.

NOTICE

� If driving through water, such aswhen crossing shallow streams,first check the depth of the waterand the bottom of the river bed forfirmness. Drive slowly and avoiddeep water.

� Take all necessary safety measuresto ensure that water damage to theengine or other components doesnot occur.

Water entering the engine air intakewill cause severe engine damage.

Water can wash the grease fromwheel bearings, causing rusting andpremature failure, and may also en-ter the differentials, transmissionand transfer case, reducing the gearoil’s lubricating qualities.

� Sand and mud that has accumulatedin brake drums and around brakediscs may affect braking efficiencyand may damage brake system com-ponents.

� Always perform a maintenance in-spection after each day of off−roaddriving that has taken you throughrough terrain, sand, mud, or water.For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Winter driving tipsMake sure you have a proper freezeprotection of engine coolant.

Your coolant must contain ethylene−glycoltype coolant for a proper corrosionprotection of aluminum components. Use“TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equivalent.

See page 253 in Section 7−2 for detailsabout coolant type selection.

NOTICE

Do not use alcohol type antifreeze orplain water alone.

When it is extremely cold, we recommendto use 60% solution for your Toyota, toprovide protection down to about −50�C(−58�F). Do not use more than 70% solu-tion for better coolant performance.

Check the condition of the battery andcables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity ofany battery, so it must be in top shapeto provide enough power for winter start-ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visuallyinspect the battery. Your Toyota dealerand most service stations will be pleasedto check the level of charge.



Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 252 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer–he will be pleased tohelp.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not usethe parking brake, or snow or water accu-mulated in and around the parking brakemechanism may freeze, making it hard torelease.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle can be dinghy towed (withfour wheels on the ground) from thefront behind a motorhome.

CAUTION

Dinghy towing requires special equip-ment and accessories. Please refer toyour service outlet of the motorhomemanufacture for the recommendedequipment.



NOTICE

Dinghy towing does not eliminate thepossibility of damage to your vehicle.

DINGHY TOWING TIPS

Before dinghy towing, be sure to ob-serve the following in order to reducethe damage to your vehicle.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

2. Shift the selector lever into the “N”position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”position. Make sure the audio is turnedoff and any item is not plugged intothe power outlet.

NOTICE

To avoid the locking of the steeringwheel, turn the ignition switch to the“ACC” position.

4. Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

To prevent the vehicle from beingdamaged, observe following.

� Do not tow the vehicle at the ve-hicle speed more than 88 km/h (55mph).

� Do not tow the vehicle for morethan 320 km (200 miles).

After dinghy towing or at the recom-mended distance limit, let the engine idlefor more than 3 minutes before driving thevehicle or resuming towing. NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle from therear. This may cause serious damageto your vehicle.



Trailer towingYour vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−and−load carrying vehicle. Tow-ing a trailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For yoursafety and the safety of others, you mustnot overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyotawarranties do not apply to damage ormalfunction caused by towing a trailer forcommercial purposes. Ask your localToyota dealer for further details beforetowing.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Toyota dealer for further in-formation on additional requirementssuch as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

� The total trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo load) mustnot exceed the following. Exceedingthis weight is dangerous.

Vehicles with 2AZ−FE engine1360 kg (3000 lb.)

Vehicles with 1MZ−FE engine1585 kg (3500 lb.)

� The gross combination weight (sumof your vehicle weight plus its loadand the total trailer weight) mustnot exceed the following.





� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

Tongue load

Total trailer weight� 100 = 9 to 11%

Total trailer weight Tongue load

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceed the following.



Never load the trailer with moreweight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailer loadshould be in the front half of thetrailer and the remaining 40% in therear.



HITCHES

� If you wish to install a trailer hitch, youshould consult with your Toyota dealer.

� Use only a hitch recommended by thehitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weightrequirement.

� The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

� The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

� Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires.

1 Trailer ball load rating2 Ball diameter3 Shank length 4 Shank diameter

TRAILER BALL

Follow these easy steps to properly deter-mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-plication:

1. Determine the correct trailer ball sizefor the trailer coupler. Most couplersare stamped with the required trailerball size. The sizes you will most likelyfind stamped on the coupler are:

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

III 2—5/16 in.

II 2 in.

I 1—7/8 in.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball tomatch or exceed the gross trailerweight rating of the trailer. The trailerball load rating should be printed onthe top of the ball.

3. When mounted in the ball mount, thethreaded ball shank must protrude be-yond the bottom of the lock washerand nut at least 2 threads. The trailerball shank must be matched to the ballmount hole diameter size.



1 Coupler 2 Trailer ball

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TOTRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

No matter which class of tow hitch ap-plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailerball setup on must be the proper heightfor the coupler on the trailer.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers with brakesthat conform to any applicable federaland state/provincial regulations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain should crossunder the trailer tongue to prevent thetongue from dropping to the ground incase it becomes damaged or sepa-rated. For correct safety chain proce-dures, follow the hitch or trailermanufacturer’s recommendations.

CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 256 in Sec-tion 7−2 for instructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.



TRAILER LIGHTS

� Your vehicle is equipped with a wireharness stored in the rear end underbody. Some models are fitted with asocket for trailer lights under the rearbumper. Use either of them to connectand operate the trailer lights. However,the trailer lights must comply with fed-eral, state/provincial and local regula-tions. See your local recreational ve-hicle dealer or rental agency for thecorrect type of wiring and relays foryour trailer. Check for correct operationof the turn signals and stop lights eachtime you hitch up. Direct splicing maydamage your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, transmission, differen-tial, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purposes.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.



� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer). Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.

� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

� In order to maintain engine braking effi-ciency, do not use overdrive.

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 213 inSection 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.



When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,start the engine. Be sure to keep thebrake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page256 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unneeded weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the engine, causinggreater fuel consumption.

� Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Oncethe engine is running smoothly, begindriving—but gently. Remember, howev-er, that on cold winter days this maytake a little longer.

� Keep the automatic transmissionoverdrive turned on when enginebraking is not required. Driving withthe overdrive off will reduce the fueleconomy. (For details, see “Automatictransmission” on page 111 in Section1−6.)

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into highgear as quickly as possible.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer



� Avoid long engine idling. If you havea long wait and you are not in traffic,it is better to turn off the engine andstart again later.

� Avoid engine lugging or over−rev-ving. Use a gear position suitable forthe road on which you are travelling.

� Avoid continuous speeding up andslowing down. Stop−and−go drivingwastes fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting the curb andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

� Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease,brakes not adjusted, etc. alllower engine performance and contrib-ute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”).

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coastdown hills. Your power steering andbrake booster will not function with-out the engine running. Also, theemission control system operatesproperly only when the engine is run-ning.



IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIf your vehicle will not start 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your engine stalls while driving 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 227. . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 228. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4



Before making these checks, make sureyou have followed the correct startingprocedure given in “How to start theengine” on page 194 in Section 3 and thatyou have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle isequipped with the engine immobiliser sys-tem, also check whether the other keyswill start the engine. If they work, yourkey may be broken. Have the keychecked at your Toyota dealer. If none ofyour keys work, the system is possiblybroken. Call your Toyota dealer. (See“Keys (with engine immobiliser system)”on page 12 in Section 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or isturning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals aretight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switchon the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes outwhen the starter is cranked, the batteryis discharged. You may try jump start-ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page211 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still willnot start, it needs adjustment or repair.Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repairshop.

NOTICE

Do not pull−or push−start the vehicle.It may damage the vehicle or causea collision when the engine starts.Also the three−way catalytic convertermay overheat and become a fire haz-ard.

If the engine turns over at its normalspeed but will not start—

1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK” and try starting the engineagain.

2. If the engine will not start, the enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking. See “(b) Starting a floodedengine” on page 210 for further instruc-tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyotadealer or qualified repair shop.

(b) Starting a flooded engineIf the engine will not start, your enginemay be flooded because of repeatedcranking.

If this happens, turn the key to “START”with the accelerator pedal held down.Keep the key and accelerator pedal thesepositions for 15 seconds and releasethem. Then try starting the engine withyour foot off the accelerator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-conds of cranking, release the key, waita few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needsadjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealeror qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-conds at a time. This may overheatthe starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks



(c) Jump startingTo avoid serious personal injury anddamage to your vehicle which might re-sult from battery explosion, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, these instructions must befollowed precisely.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

� Warning: Battery posts, terminalsand related accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.



Dischargedbattery

Boosterbattery

Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

Jumpercable

Positiveterminal (“+”mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal on the boosterbattery.

Jumper cable

Boosterbattery

Dischargedbattery

Negativeterminal (“−”mark)

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) cable to the negative (−) termi-nal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) jumper cable toa solid, stationary, unpainted, metallicpoint of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

The recommended connecting point isshown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 2AZ−FE engine

Connecting point for 1MZ−FE engine



Do not connect it to or near any partthat moves when the engine iscranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

5. Start your engine in the normal way.After starting, run it at about 2000 rpmfor several minutes with the acceleratorpedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent (for example, lights left on),you should have it checked.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the engineagain.

If the engine will not start, see “If yourvehicle will not start” on page 210.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

If your vehicle overheatsIf your engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating, if you ex-perience a loss of power, or if you heara loud knocking or pinging noise, theengine has probably overheated. Youshould follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the transmission in “P”and apply the parking brake. Turn offthe air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the engine.Wait until the steam subsides beforeopening the hood. If there is no coolantboiling over or steam, leave the enginerunning and make sure the electriccooling fan is operating. If it is not,turn the ignition off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

If your engine stalls while driving



3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealerfor assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the en-gine is running. Fill it about half full.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the engine and radiator arehot. Serious injury could result fromscalding hot fluid and steam blownout under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperaturehas cooled to normal, again check thecoolant level in the reservoir. If neces-sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-ous coolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If you have a flat tire—1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place well away fromthe traffic. Avoid stopping on the centerdivider of a highway. Park on a levelspot with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on youremergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and putthe transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicleon the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions thor-oughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.



� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheel diagonally oppositeto the one being changed if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone.

� Use the jack only for lifting yourvehicle during wheel changing.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notput an object on or under the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only high enoughto remove and change the tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a de-flated tire. Driving even a short dis-tance can damage a tire and wheelbeyond repair.

—Required tools and spare tire

1. Get the required tools and sparetire.

1. Jack handle2. Wheel nut wrench3. Front towing eyelet4. Jack5. Spare tire

To prepare yourself for an emergency, youshould familiarize yourself with the use ofthe jack, each of the tools and their stor-age locations.



Turn the jack joint by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1until the jack is free.To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 untilthe jack is firmly secured to prevent itflying forward during a collision or suddenbraking.

To remove the spare tire:

1. Hang the deck board on the weather-strip.

2. Remove the spare tire cover.

3. Loosen the bolt and remove it.

—Blocking the wheel

2. Block the wheel diagonally oppositethe flat tire to keep the vehicle fromrolling when it is jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheelblock from the front for the front wheelsor from the rear for the rear wheels.



—Removing wheel ornament

Steel wheels

Aluminium wheels

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using thebeveled end of the wheel nut wrench asshown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the ornament byhand. Take due care in handling theornament to avoid unexpected person-al injury.

—Loosening wheel nuts

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before rais-ing the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise toloosen. To get maximum leverage, fit thewrench to the nut so that the handle ison the right side, as shown above. Grabthe wrench near the end of the handleand pull up on the handle. Be careful thatthe wrench does not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrewthem about one−half turn.



—Positioning the jack

5. Position the jack at the correct jackpoint as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on alevel and solid place.

—Raising your vehicle

6. After making sure that no one is inthe vehicle, raise it high enough sothat the spare tire can be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the spare tirethan when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handleinto the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn itclockwise. As the jack touches the vehicleand begins to lift, double−check that it isproperly positioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when thevehicle is supported by the jackalone.



—Changing wheels

7. Remove the wheel nuts and changetires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.

Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with the bolts.Then lift up the wheel and get at least thetop bolt started through its hole. Wigglethe tire and press it back over the otherbolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove any cor-rosion on the mounting surfaces with awire brush or such. Installation of wheelswithout good metal−to−metal contact at themounting surface can cause wheel nuts toloosen and eventually cause a wheel tocome off while driving. Therefore after thefirst 1600 km (1000 miles), check to seethat the wheel nuts are tight.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fingertight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end in-ward) and tighten them as much as youcan by hand. Press back on the tire backand see if you can tighten them more.



—Lowering your vehicle

9. Lower the vehicle completely andtighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclockwise tolower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and turnit clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do notuse other tools or any additional leverageother than your hands, such as a hammer,pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrenchis securely engaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in theorder shown. Repeat the process until allthe nuts are tight. (For the tighteningtorque, see “Tires” on page 277 in Section8.)

CAUTION

When lowering the vehicle, make sureall portions of your body and all oth-er persons around will not be injuredas the vehicle is lowered to theground.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament

Steel wheels

Aluminum wheels



10. Reinstall the wheel ornament.

1. Put the wheel ornament into position.

2. Then tap it firmly with the side or heelof your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

Take due care in handling the orna-ment to avoid unexpected personalinjury.

—After changing wheels11. Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specificationdesignated on page 277 in Section 8. Ifthe pressure is lower, drive slowly to thenearest service station and fill to the cor-rect pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflationvalve cap as dirt and moisture could getinto the valve core and possibly cause airleakage. If the cap is missing, have a newone put on as soon as possible.

12. Restow all the tools and jack secure-ly.

As soon after changing wheels as pos-sible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torquespecified on page 277 in Section 8 witha torque wrench. Have a technician repairthe flat tire.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools and jack are securely in placein their storage location to reduce thepossibility of personal injury during acollision or sudden braking.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

If your vehicle needs to be towed—



(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear


Four−wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 223 in this section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear—

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.




Four−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.


(c) Towing with sling type truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.

—Emergency towing

Front

Rear



If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed by a cable or chain se-cured to one of the emergency towingeyelets on the front of the vehicle orthe right emergency towing eyelet un-der the rear of the vehicle. Use extremecaution when towing the vehicle.

NOTICE

Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelet and towing cable orchain. The eyelet and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in “N”. The keymust be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”(engine running).

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-er assist for the brakes and steeringwill not work so steering and brakingwill be much harder than usual.

1. Pull up the deck board and remove thefront towing eyelet by turning it coun-terclockwise. (For the towing eyeletlocation, see “—Required tools andspare tire” on page 215 in this sec-tion.)

—Installing front towing eyelet



2. Remove the front towing eyelet coveron the front bumper.

3. Secure it to the hole on the bumper byturning clockwise.

4. Tighten the front towing eyelet securelyby a wheel nut wrench.

NOTICE

Make sure that the front towing eyeletis tightened securely, or it may beloosened or removed when towing thevehicle.



� Before emergency towing, check thatthe eyelet is not broken or damagedand that the installation bolts are notloose.

� Fasten the towing cable or chain se-curely to the eyelet.

� Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steadyand even force.

� To avoid damaging the eyelet, do notpull from the side or at a verticalangle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet isused to get out when your vehiclebecomes struck in mud, sand or oth-er condition from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower, make sure to observe the pre-cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,excessive stress will be put on theeyelet and the towing cable or chainmay break, causing serious injury ordamage.

� If the towing vehicle can hardlymove, do not forcibly continue thetowing. Contact your Toyota dealeror a commercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

� Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

� Keep away from the vehicle duringtowing.

The following methods are effective to getout when your vehicle is struck in mud,sand or other condition from which thevehicle cannot be driven out under its ownpower. Use extreme caution when towingvehicles. In addition, keep away from thevehicles and towing cable or chain whentowing.

� Remove the soil and sand in the frontand the back of the tires.

� Place a stone or wood under the tires.

—Emergency towing eyelet precautions

—Tips for towing a stuck vehicle



If you cannot shift the selector leverout of “P” position to other positionseven though the brake pedal is de-pressed, use the shift lock override but-ton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flat−bladedscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Insert your finger into the hole topush down the shift lock overridebutton. You can shift out of “P”position only while pushing the but-ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If you lose your keysYou can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobiliser system, thedealer will also need your master key.

Vehicles with engine immobiliser system—Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-liser system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 12 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

If you cannot shift automatictransmission selector lever



You can purchase a new wireless re-mote control transmitter at your Toyotadealer.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter



CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CAREProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washing and waxing your Toyota 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the interior 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5



Toyota, through its diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, has done its part tohelp prevent corrosion and has providedyou with the finest quality vehicleconstruction. Now, it is up to you. Propercare of your Toyota can help ensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which are prevented fromquick−drying due to lack of proper ven-tilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� High pressure water or steam is effec-tive for cleaning the vehicle’s undersideand wheel housings. Pay particularattention to these areas as it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to simply wet themud and debris without removing them.The lower edge of doors, rocker panelsand frame members have drain holeswhich should not be allowed to clogwith dirt as trapped water in theseareas can cause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 231 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion



Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it in coveredwith water or snow, your garage may beso damp it will cause corrosion. Even ifyour garage is heated, a wet vehicle cancorrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When having coal tar, tree sap, birddroppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in the areas where thereis a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dustand chemical substance

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION

When cleaning under floor or chassis,be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or in thewheel wells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splashes an ornament, be sure towash it off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

CAUTION

Do not attach the heavily damagedplastic wheel ornament. It may fly offthe wheel and cause accidents whilethe vehicle is moving.

Washing and waxing your Toyota



Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

NOTICE

Do not use organic substances (gaso-line, kerosene, benzine or strong sol-vents), which may be toxic or causedamage.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some type ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

NOTICE

With mast type antenna:

To prevent damage to the antenna,make sure it is removed before driv-ing your Toyota through an automaticcar wash.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Once a month or if the vehicle surfacedoes not repel water well, apply wax.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

NOTICE

Always remove the plastic bumpers ifyour vehicle is re−painted and placedin a high heat paint waxing booth.High temperatures could damage thebumpers.



Cleaning the interior

CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, resulting in seriousinjury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.



Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, car au-dio, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apply the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather Interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.

NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.



� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.



VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREMaintenance requirements 238. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6



Maintenance requirementsYour Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble−free, safe, and economicaldrivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. And if anyproblems should arise with your vehiclewhile under warranty, your Toyota dealerwill promptly take care of it. Again, besure to keep a copy of the repair orderfor any service performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 243 inSection 7.



If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

General maintenanceListed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only where ade-quate ventilation can be obtained ifyou run the engine.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Tire pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. Seepage 256 in Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts, damageor excessive wear. See page 257 in Sec-tion 7−2 for additional information. Whenchecking the tires, make sure no nuts aremissing, and check the nuts for loose-ness. Tighten them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For scheduledmaintenance information, please refer tothe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page258 in Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all side doors and back dooroperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.



INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers

Check that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all seat controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operatesmoothly and that all latches lock securelyin any position. Check that the head re-straints move up and down smoothly andthat the locks hold securely in any latchedposition. For folding−down rear seatbacks,check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

At a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-nism

Check the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 267 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the see−throughreservoir when the engine is cold. Seepage 253 in Section 7−2 for additionalinformation.

Battery electrolyte level

Your Toyota has a maintenance free bat-tery. You do not have to add distilled wa-ter. For longer life of the battery, however,see page 264 for additional information.



Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 254 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with theengine turned off and the vehicle parkedon a level spot. See page 252 in Section7−2 for additional information.

Power steering fluid level

Check the level through the reservoir. Thelevel should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”range depending on the fluid temperature.See page 255 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 183 in Section 2.)

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle need repairing?



DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroduction

Engine compartment overview 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse locations 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Do−it−yourself service precautions 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts and tools 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1



1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse blocks

6. Battery

7. Electric cooling fans

8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Windshield and rear window washer fluid tank

Engine compartment overview�2AZ−FE engine



1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Power steering fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse blocks

6. Battery

7. Electric cooling fans

8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Windshield washer fluid tank

�1MZ−FE engine



Fuse locations

Spare fuses

With daytime running light system



If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 249 in this section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

CAUTION

� When the engine is running, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan and enginedrive belts. (Removing rings,watches, and ties is advisable.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold, power steeringfluid reservoir and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the engine is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the battery. It contains poi-sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Do−it−yourself service precautions




� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

NOTICE

� Remember that battery and ignitioncable carry high currents or volt-ages. Be careful of accidentallycausing a short circuit.

� Add only demineralized or distilledwater to fill the radiator. And if youspill some of the coolant, be sureto wash it off with water to preventit from damaging the parts or paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not overfill automatic transmis-sion fluid and power steering fluid,or the transmission and powersteering could be damaged.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Positioning the jack

Front

Rear (two−wheel drive models)



Rear (four−wheel drive models)

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofpersonal injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start or run the engine whileyour vehicle is supported by thejack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the transmission in “P”.Block the wheels on the oppositeside of the jack up point if neces-sary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notput an object on or under the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

Parts and toolsHere is a list of parts and tools you willneed on performing do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

Checking the engine oil level

Parts (if level is low):

� Engine oil API grade SJ,“Energy−Conserving” or ILSACmultigrade having viscosity proper foryour climate

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

Checking the engine coolant level


� “TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equiva-lentSee page 253 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about coolant type selection.

� Demineralized or distilled water

Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

Checking brake fluid


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid



Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

Checking power steering fluid


� Automatic transmission fluidDEXRON�II or III

Tools:


� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

Checking battery condition

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminalclamp bolts)

Checking and replacing fuses

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

Adding washer fluid

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze(for winter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

Replacing light bulbs

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in“Replacing light bulbs” on page 268 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver



DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the engine coolant level 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 254. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking power steering fluid 255. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire pressure 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2



Checking the engine oil level

Low level Full level

2AZ−FEengine

1MZ−FEengine

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the engine at operating tempera-ture and turned off, check the oil levelon the dipstick.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicleshould be on a level spot. After turningoff the engine, wait a few minutes forthe oil to drain back into the bottom ofthe engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, and wipe it cleanwith a rag.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel on the end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick.

The approximate quantity of oil needed tofill between the low level and the full levelon the dipstick is indicated below for ref-erence.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):2AZ−FE engine 1.0 (1.1, 0.9)1MZ−FE engine 1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

NOTICE

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

Use API grade SJ, “Energy−Conserving”or ILSAC multigrade engine oil.

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

5W-30 Preferred

Temperature range anticipated beforenext oil change

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for yourvehicle, for good fuel economy andgood starting in cold weather.

If you use SAE 10W−30 engine oil inextremely low temperatures, the enginemay become difficult to start, so SAE5W−30 engine oil is recommended.



API service symbol

ILSAC certification mark

Oil identification marks

Either or both API registered marks areadded to some oil containers to helpyou select the oil you should use.

The API Service Symbol is located any-where on the outside of the container.

The top portion of the label shows the oilquality by API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) designations such as SJ. The centerportion of the label shows the SAE viscos-ity grade such as SAE 5W−30. “Energy−Conserving” shown in the lower portion,indicates that the oil has fuel−saving ca-pabilities.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is displayed on the front ofthe container.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the engine is cold. The cool-ant level is satisfactory if it is betweenthe “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.If the level is low, add ethylene−glycoltype coolant for a proper corrosionprotection of aluminum components.

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith engine temperature. However, if thelevel is on or below the “L” line, addcoolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

Always use ethylene−glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of alumi-num components. See information in thenext column.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

Checking the engine coolant level



CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when the en-gine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour engine cooling system. Your coolantmust contain ethylene−glycol type coolantfor a proper corrosion protection of yourengine that contains aluminum compo-nents. Use “TOYOTA Long Life Coolant”or equivalent.

In addition to preventing freezing and sub-sequent damage to the engine, this typeof coolant will also prevent corrosion. Fur-ther supplemental inhibitors or additivesare neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for informationon freeze protection. Follow the manufac-turer’s directions for how much to mixwith plain water (preferably demineralizedwater or distilled water). The total capacityof the cooling system is given on page276 in Section 8.

We recommend to use 50% solution foryour Toyota, to provide protection down toabout −35�C (−31�F). When it is extreme-ly cold, to provide protection down toabout −50�C (−58�F), 60% solution is rec-ommended. Do not use more than 70%solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE


Checking brake fluid

To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear. Sobe sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, itmay indicate a serious mechanical prob-lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 orFMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to thebrake reservoir.



Remove and replace the reservoir cap byhand. Fill the brake fluid to the dottedline. This brings the fluid to the correctlevel when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Onceopened, brake fluid absorbs moisture fromthe air, and excess moisture can cause adangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoirbecause brake fluid can harm youreyes and damage painted surfaces. Iffluid gets in your eyes, flush youreyes with clean water immediately. Ifyou still feel uncomfortable with youreyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sureto wash it off with water to preventit from damaging the parts or paint.

Checking power steering fluid

OpenIf hot O.K.

If hot addIf cold add

If cold O.K.Close

Check the fluid level through the reser-voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-mission fluid DEXRON�II or III.

If the vehicle has been driven around 80km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a littlemore in frigid temperatures), the fluid ishot (80�C or 175�F). You may also checkthe level when the fluid is cold (aboutroom temperature, 10�C—30�C or50�F—85�F) if the engine has not beenrun for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoirtank and look at the fluid level. If the fluidis cold, the level should be in the “COLD”range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid levelshould be in the “HOT” range. If the levelis at the low side of either range, addautomatic transmission fluid DEXRON�II orIII to bring the level within the range.

To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-voir cap, visually check the steering boxcase, vane pump and hose connectionsfor leaks or damage.

CAUTION

The reservoir tank may be hot so becareful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE

Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-ing could be damaged.



Checking tire pressure

Keep your tire pressures at the properlevel.

The recommended cold tire pressures, tiresize and the vehicle capacity weight aregiven on page 274 and page 277 in Sec-tion 8. They are also on the tire pressurelabel as shown.

You should check the tire pressures everytwo weeks, or at least once a month. Anddo not forget the spare!

Incorrect tire pressure can reduce tirelife and make your vehicle less safe todrive.

Low tire pressure results in excessivewear, poor handling, reduced fuel econo-my, and the possibility of blowouts fromoverheated tires. Also, low tire pressurecan cause poor sealing of the tire bead.If the tire pressure is excessively low,there is the possibility of wheel deforma-tion and/or tire separation.

High tire pressure produces a harsh ride,handling problems, excessive wear at thecenter of the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of tire damage from road haz-ards.

If a tire frequently needs refilling, have itchecked by your Toyota dealer.

The following instructions for checkingtire pressure should be observed:

� The pressure should be checked onlywhen the tires are cold. If your ve-hicle has been parked for at least 3hours and has not been driven formore than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, youwill get an accurate cold tire pressurereading.

� Always use a tire pressure gauge.The appearance of a tire can be mis-leading. Besides, tire pressures thatare even just a few pounds off candegrade ride and handling.

� Do not bleed or reduce tire pressureafter driving. It is normal for the tirepressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capacityweight. The passenger and luggageweight should be located so that thevehicle is balanced.

� Be sure to reinstall the tire inflationvalve caps. Without the valve caps,dirt or moisture could get into the valvecore and cause air leakage. If the capshave been lost, have new ones put onas soon as possible.



Checking and replacing tires

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire tread for the tread wearindicators. If the indicators show, re-place the tires.

The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help you knowwhen the tires need replacement. Whenthe tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06in.) or less, the indicators will appear. Ifyou can see the indicators in two or moreadjacent grooves, the tire should be re-placed. The lower the tread, the higherthe risk of skidding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lostif the tread wears down below 4 mm(0.16 in.).

Check the tires regularly for damagesuch as cuts, splits and cracks. If anydamage is found, consult with a techni-cian and have the tire repaired or re-placed.

Even if the damage does not appear seri-ous, a qualified technician should examinethe damage. Objects which have pene-trated the tire may have caused internaldamage.

Any tires which are over 6 years oldmust be checked by a qualified techni-cian even if damage is not obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.

This also applies to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

Two−wheel drive models—When replac-ing a tire, use only the same size andconstruction as originally installed andwith the same or greater load capacity.

Four−wheel drive models—When replac-ing tires, make sure all the tires are thesame brand. Only use the same sizeand construction as the originallyinstalled tires, with the same or greaterload capacity.

Using any other size or type of tire mayseriously affect handling, ride, speedome-ter/odometer calibration, ground clearance,and clearance between the body and tiresor snow chains.

CAUTION

� Do not mix radial, bias belted, orbias−ply tires on your vehicle. Itcan cause dangerous handling char-acteristics, resulting in loss of con-trol.

� Do not use tire or wheels otherthan the manufacturer’s recom-mended size.

NOTICE

Four−wheel drive models:Do not use tires of different brands,sizes and constructions. This maydamage the drive system.

Toyota recommends all four tires, or atleast both front or rear tires be re-placed as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 214in Section 4 for tire change procedure.



When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Wheels can get outof balance with regular use and shouldtherefore be balanced occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the airvalve should also be replaced with anew one.

Rotating tires

To equalize tire wear and help extendtire life, Toyota recommends that yourotate your tires according to the main-tenance schedule. (For scheduled main-tenance information, please refer to the“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) Howev-er, the most appropriate timing for tirerotation may vary according to yourdriving habits and road surface condi-tions.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page 214in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear is usu-ally caused by incorrect tire pressure, im-proper wheel alignment, out−of−balancewheels, or severe braking.



WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select the samesize, construction and load capacity asthe original tires on your Toyota.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

NOTICE

Four−wheel drive models:Do not use tires of different brands,sizes and constructions. This maydamage the drive system.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires, which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Side chain

Cross chain

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Use the following type chains.

mm (in.)A Diameter of side chain 3 (0.12)B Width of side chain 10 (0.39)C Length of side chain 30 (1.18)D Diameter of cross chain 4 (0.16)E Width of cross chain 14 (0.55)F Length of cross chain 25 (0.98)

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check thembefore installing chains.

Installing snow tires and chains



NOTICE

If the wrong combination of tire andchain is used, the chains could dam-age the vehicle body.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering the curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

Replacing wheelsWHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace damaged wheels, thetire may slip off the wheel or cause lossof handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.



Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

NOTICE

Four−wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types. This maydamage the drive system.

Aluminum wheel precautions� When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only the Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.



DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking battery condition 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery recharging precautions 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3



CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.


—Checking battery exterior

Terminals Ground cable

Hold−down clamp

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking battery condition——Precautions



NOTICE

� Be sure the engine and all accesso-ries are off before performing main-tenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

—Checking battery fluid

Type A

Green DarkClear or light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY HYDROMETER

Check the battery condition by thehydrometer color.

Hydrometer colorCondition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Battery recharging precautionsDuring recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while theengine is running. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.



Checking and replacing fuses

Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type CIf the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 246 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull a suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seeon page 278 in Section 8 of this manualfor the functions controlled by each circuit.



Type A fuses can be pulled out by usingthe pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “RADIONO.1” or “RADIO NO.2” fuse, which maybe dispensable for normal driving, and useit if its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeas possible to the rating. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

Adding washer fluidIf any washer does not work or lowwindshield washer fluid level warninglight comes on, the washer tank may beempty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.



Replacing light bulbs—The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION

� To prevent yourself from burning,do not replace the light bulbs whilethey are hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogged up in the rain. However,if there is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights (low) 9006 51 B

Headlights (high) 9005 60 A

Front fog lights — 35 C

Front turn signals/parking and frontside marker lights

— 21/5 F

Rear turn signal lights

— 21 E

Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 D

Rear side marker 4CP 5 D

Back−up lights 7440 21 D

License plate light 4CP 5 D

High mounted stop light

921 18 D

Interior lights — 8 G

Personal light — 10 F

Vanity lights — 1.5 G

Door courtesy lights

— 5 D

Glove box light — 1.2 F



A: HB3 halogen bulbsB: HB4 halogen bulbsC: H3 halogen bulbsD: Wedge base bulbsE: Wedge base bulbs (amber)F: Single end bulbsG: Double end bulbs

—Headlights

1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb basecounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle as shown.

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb baseand install a new bulb.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.



3. Insert the bulb base into the mount-ing hole by turning it clockwise.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

If either the left or right front fog, frontturn signal/parking or rear side markerlights burns out, contact your Toyotadealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace any of the lightbulbs mentioned above by yourself.You may damage the vehicle.

—Front fog, front turn signal/parking and rear side markerlights

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail and back−up lights



a: Stop/tail light b: Rear turn signal lightc: Stop/tail lightd: Back−up light

—High mounted stoplight



—License plate light

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.



SPECIFICATIONSDimensions and weight 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8



Dimensions and weight EngineModel:

2AZ−FE and 1MZ−FE

Type:2AZ−FE engine

4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

1MZ−FE engine6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):2AZ−FE engine

88.5 � 96.0 (3.48 � 3.78)

1MZ−FE engine87.5 � 83.0 (3.44 � 3.27)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):2AZ−FE engine

2362 (144.1)

1MZ−FE engine2995 (182.8)

Overall length mm (in.)

Overall width mm (in.)

Overall height mm (in.)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.)

Rear tread mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

Two−wheel drive models Four−wheel drive models

4685 (184.4) 4685 (184.4)

1825 (71.9) 1825 (71.9)

1690 (66.5)∗1

1745 (68.7)∗2

2715 (106.9) 2715 (106.9)

1580 (62.2) 1575 (62.0)

1565 (61.6) 1555 (61.2)

420 (925) 420 (925)

∗1: Unladen vehicle (without roof rails)∗2: Unladen vehicle (with roof rails)

1680 (66.1)∗1

1735 (68.3)∗2



FuelFuel type:

2AZ−FE engineUnleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) orhigher

1MZ−FE engineUnleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) orhigher. For improved vehicle perfor-mance, the use of premium unleadedgasoline with an Octane Rating of 91(Research Octane Number 96) orhigher is recommended.

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):75 (19.8, 16.5)

Service specificationsENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):2AZ−FE engine

Intake 0.19—0.29 (0.007—0.011)Exhaust 0.30—0.40 (0.012—0.016)

1MZ−FE engineIntake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm(in.):1.1 (0.043)

Drive belt tension measured with Bor-roughs drive belt tension gaugeNo.BT−33−73F (used belt), Ibf:

2AZ−FE engineAutomatic adjustment

1MZ−FE engine115�20

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

2AZ−FE engineWith filter 3.8 (4.0, 3.3)Without filter 3.6 (3.8, 3.2)

1MZ−FE engineWith filter 4.7 (5.0, 4.1)Without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)

Oil grade:API grade SJ, “Energy−Conserving” orILSAC multigrade engine oil is recom-mended.

Recommended oil viscosity (SAE):

5W-30 Preferred

Temperature range anticipated beforenext oil change



COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):2AZ−FE engine 6.4 (6.8, 5.6)1MZ−FE engine 9.4 (9.9, 8.2)

Coolant type:

“TOYOTA Long Life Coolant” or equiva-lent

With ethylene−glycol type coolant for aproper corrosion protection of aluminumcomponents


BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8V Fully charged12.2—12.4V Half charged11.8—12.0V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all the lightsturned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,Imp. qt.):

Two−wheel drive modelsUp to 3.3 (3.5, 2.9)

Four−wheel drive modelsUp to 3.9 (4.1, 3.4)

Fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid Type T−IV

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only Toyota Genuine ATF Type T−IV(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid inassuring optimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmissionfluid other than Toyota Genuine ATFType T−IV may cause deterioration inshift quality, locking up of your trans-mission accompanied by vibration, andultimately damage the automatic trans-mission of your vehicle.

TRANSFER(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.9 (1.0, 0.8)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

REAR DIFFERENTIAL(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):0.9 (1.0, 0.8)

Oil type:Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:Above −18�C (0�F)

SAE 90Below −18�C (0�F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90



BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)with the engine running, mm (in.):

106 (4.2)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):

5—7 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Power steering fluid type:Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON�IIor III

TiresTire size:

P225/70R16 101S

Tire pressure, kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi):210 (2.1, 30)

When driving under the above vehicle loadconditions at sustained high speeds above160 km/h (100 mph), in countries wheresuch speeds are permitted by−law, inflatethe front and rear tires to 240 kPa (2.4kgf/cm2 or bar, 35 psi) provided that itdoes not exceed the maximum cold tirepressure molded on the tire sidewall.

Wheel size:16 � 6 1/2JJ

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information ontires (e.g. replacing tires or re-placing wheels), see “Checkingtire pressure” through “Aluminumwheel precautions”, pages 256through 261, in Section 7−2.



Fuses

Engine compartment

Instrument panel

Fuses (type A)

1. STARTER 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system

2. ABS3 7.5 A: Vehicle skid control sys-tem

3. HEAD LP RH LWR 15 A: Right−handheadlight (low beam)

4. HEAD LP LH LWR 15 A: Left−handheadlight (low beam)

5. A/F 25 A: Air fuel ratio sensor

6. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system

7. TOWING 20 A: Trailer lights

Engine compartment (with daytime running light system)

8. HORN 10 A: Horns

9. SECURITY 15 A: Theft deterrent sys-tem

10. HEAD LP RH UPR 10 A: Right−handheadlight (high beam)

11. ECU−B 7.5 A: Theft deterrent system,air conditioning system, vehicle skidcontrol system, gauges and meters,wireless remote control system, powerdoor lock

12. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, fuel pump, engine immobilisersystem



13. DOOR LOCK 25 A: Power door locksystem, theft deterrent system

14. HEAD LP LH UPR 10 A: Left−handheadlight (high beam)

15. RADIO NO.1 25 A: Car audio system

16. DOME 10 A: Personal light, interiorlights, vanity mirror lights, ignitionswitch light, wireless remote controlsystem, gauges and meters

17. HAZARD 15 A: Emergency flashers,instrument panel light

18. SPARE 7.5 A: Spare fuse

19. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse

20. SPARE 25 A: Spare fuse

21. IGN 7.5 A: Gauges and meters, SRSairbag system

22. RADIO NO.2 7.5 A: Car audio system

23. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter

24. D RR DOOR 20 A: Power windows

25. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

26. FR FOG 10 A: Front fog lights

27. SRS−IG 15 A: SRS airbag system

28. ECU−IG 15 A: Electric moon roof,anti−lock brake system, vehicle skidcontrol system, shift lock system,charging system, cruise control system,emergency flashers, starting system

29. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wipers andwasher

30. P RR DOOR 20 A: Power windows

31. P FR DOOR 25 A: Power windows,door courtesy lights, power door locksystem

32. S/ROOF 20 A: Electric moon roof

33. HEATER 15 A: Air conditioning system,electric cooling fan, rear defogger, out-side rear view mirror defogger, gaugesand meters

34. IG1 7.5 A: Back up lights, vehicle skidcontrol system, multiport fuel injectionsystem/sequential multiport fuel injec-tion system, outside rear view mirrorheaters, power door lock system, wire-less remote control system

35. RR WIP 15 A: Rear window wiper

36. STOP 20 A: Stop lights, high mountedstoplight, anti−lock brake system, ve-hicle skid control system, shift locksystem, cruise control system, multiportfuel injection system/sequential multi-port fuel injection system

37. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

38. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heaters

39. IG2 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, charging system, starter sys-tem

40. WASHER 20 A: Washer fluid levelwarning light

41. RR FOG 7.5 A: No circuit

42. FR DEF 20 A: Air conditioning system,outside rear view mirror defoggers

43. D FR DOOR 20 A: Power windows,door courtesy lights

44. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license platelights, instrument panel lights, front foglights, front side marker lights, rearside marker lights, parking lights

45. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights

46. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light sys-tem

Fuses (type B)

47. AM2 30 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, starting system

48. ABS2 40 A: Anti−lock brake system,vehicle skid control system

49. ABS1 40 A: Anti−lock brake system,vehicle skid control system

50. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system



51. RDI 30 A: Electric cooling fans

52. RR DEF 30 A: Rear window defoggers

53. CDS 30 A: Electric cooling fans

54. RDI 50 A: No circuit

55. MAIN 40 A: “HEAD LP RH LWR”,“HEAD LP LH LWR”, “HEAD LP RHUPR” and “HEAD LP LH UPR” fuses

56. AM1 40 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential multiport fuel injectionsystem, starting system

57. POWER 30 A: Power seat

Fuse (type C)

58. ALT 140 A: “ABS1”, “ABS2”, “RDI”,“CDS”, “RR DEF”, “HEATER”, “AM1”,“AM2”, “TAIL”, “PANEL”, “STOP”,“S/ROOF” and “SEAT HTR” fuses



REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uniform tire quality grading 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9



If you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of ve-hicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may ei-ther call the Auto Safety Hotlinetoll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or366−0123 in Washington, D.C.area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation,Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hot-line.

Uniform tire quality gradingThis information has been prepared in ac-cordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-tration of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyotavehicles with information on uniform tirequality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.

DOT quality grades—All passenger cartires must conform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades. Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners



Treadwear—The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wear rateof the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government testcourse. For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1−1/2) timesas well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and may de-part significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road characteris-tics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C, and they represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on spe-cified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not includecornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C—The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire to de-generate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a lev-el of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for thistire are established for a tire that is prop-erly inflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combina-tion, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.



Publication No. OM48432UPart No. 01999-48432Printed in Japan 01-0106-00

( U)

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 102. . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle will not start 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your engine stalls while driving 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break−in period 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the engine 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Complete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

2AZ−FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher

1MZ−FE engine: UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higherFor improved vehicle performance, the use of premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.

See page 179 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 75 L (19.8 gal., 16.5 lmp.gal.)

Engine oil: API grade SJ, “Energy−Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 252 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 256 through 261.

Tire pressure: See page 277.

U−3

C



You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.



Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for HIGHLANDER, written in

English, may be purchased as applicable from any

Toyota dealer.

Pub. Name: 2001 HIGHLANDER Repair ManualPub. No.: RM837U1 (Maintenance, Preparation,

Service specifications and Diagnostics)

RM837U2 (Engine, Chassis, Body and

Electrical)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to preventsmall problems from growing into larger ones later on.The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenanceis required and clearly explains how to do the workyourself step−by−step.Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.


i2001 MY HIGHLANDER_U (OM48432U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your completesatisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:

� U.S. OWNERS: Toyota Customer Assistance Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331

� CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 (1−888−869−6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

© 2001 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.



WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU � PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

Important information about this manual€¦ · Scrapping of your Toyota The SRS airbag and seat...

Documents

Transcript of Important information about this manual€¦ · Scrapping of your Toyota The SRS airbag and seat...